Volvo 2011 S80 Owner`s manual

VOLVO S80
Owner's manual
Web Edition
Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust that you
will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile
designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you
to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating
instructions in this manual.
We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times
in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a
vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impairment that could hinder your ability to drive.
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and
emission standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle,
please contact your Volvo retailer or see the section "Contacting
Volvo" in this manual's "Introduction" chapter for information on getting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada.
Contents
00 01 02
4
00 Introduction
01 Safety
Important information................................. 8
Environment.............................................. 12
Important warnings................................... 13
Occupant safety........................................
Reporting safety defects...........................
Seat belts .................................................
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....
Occupant Weight Sensor .........................
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags .....
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...............................
Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS.....
Crash mode..............................................
Child safety...............................................
Child restraint systems.............................
Infant seats...............................................
Convertible seats......................................
Booster cushions......................................
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors..................
Top tether anchors....................................
Child restraint registration and recalls......
Child safety locks......................................
02 Locks and alarm
16
17
18
21
26
30
32
33
35
36
38
40
42
44
45
46
47
48
Remote key and key blade.......................
Valet locking .............................................
Keyless drive.............................................
Locks........................................................
Alarm.........................................................
52
59
60
63
66
Contents
03 04 05
03 Your driving environment
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
05 During your trip
Instruments and controls.......................... 70
Ignition modes.......................................... 78
Seats......................................................... 80
SeatsಥS80 Executive ............................... 86
Steering wheel.......................................... 88
Lighting..................................................... 89
Wipers and washers................................. 95
Power windows......................................... 98
Mirrors..................................................... 100
Compass*............................................... 102
Power moonroof*.................................... 103
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*... 105
Starting the engine.................................. 108
Transmission........................................... 112
Brakes..................................................... 115
Parking brake.......................................... 117
Menus and messages............................. 122
Climate system....................................... 126
Audio system.......................................... 134
Driving recommendations.......................
Refueling.................................................
Loading...................................................
Towing a trailer.......................................
Emergency towing..................................
Bluetooth® hands-free connection.........
Trip computer.........................................
Stability system.......................................
Active chassis system–Four C*...............
Cruise control..........................................
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*..............
Distance Alert* .......................................
Collision warning with Auto-brake*.........
Driver Alert System* ...............................
Park assist*.............................................
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* ............
Blind Spot Information System*..............
Passenger compartment convenience...
Passenger compartment convenience–
S80 Executive ........................................
148
154
156
158
159
161
170
173
179
184
188
192
196
204
208
213
216
218
200
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5
Contents
06 07 08
06 Wheels and tires
General information ...............................
Tire inflation.............................................
Inflation pressure—U.S. models ............
Inflation pressure—Canadian models.....
Tire designations ....................................
Glossary of tire terminology ...................
Vehicle loading .......................................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires .
Temporary Spare ...................................
Tire Sealing System................................
Changing a wheel ..................................
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
6
222
225
227
228
229
231
232
234
235
236
237
243
246
07 Maintenance and
specifications
Volvo maintenance..................................
Maintaining your car...............................
Hood and engine compartment..............
Engine oil................................................
Fluids......................................................
Replacing bulbs......................................
Wiper blades and washer fluid................
Battery.....................................................
Fuses......................................................
Vehicle care.............................................
08 Specifications
252
253
255
256
258
260
267
269
272
281
Label information.................................... 288
Specifications......................................... 290
Overview of information and warning symbols......................................................... 298
Volvo programs....................................... 301
Contents
09
09 Index
Index....................................................... 302
7
Introduction
Important information
Contacting Volvo
About this manual
In the USA:
• Before you operate your vehicle for the first
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive,
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.us
In Canada:
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp
National Customer Service
• Information contained in the balance of the
Risk of injury
• The manual is structured so that it can be
used for reference. For this reason, it
should be kept in the vehicle for ready
access.
Footnotes
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocanada.com
Display texts
North York, Ontario M2H 2N7
There are various types of decals in the vehicle
whose purpose is to provide important information in a clear and concise way. The importance of these decals is explained as follows,
in descending order of importance.
manual is extremely useful and should be
read after operating the vehicle for the first
time.
Certain pages of this manual contain information in the form of footnotes at the bottom of
the page. This information supplements the
text that the footnote number refers to (a letter
is used if the footnote refers to text in a table).
175 Gordon Baker Road
8
time, please familiarize yourself with the
information found in the chapters "Your
Driving Environment" and "During Your
Trip."
Decals
G031590
There are several displays in the driver’s field
of vision that show messages generated by
various systems and functions in the vehicle.
These texts are indicated in the Owner’s Manual by being in slightly larger type than the surrounding text and are printed in gray, (for
example: Doors automatic lock).
Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning background, white text/image on a black background. Decals of this type are used to indicate
potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this
type could result in serious injury or death.
Introduction
Important information
Risk of damage to the vehicle
Information
Types of lists used in the manual
Procedures
Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or
actions that must be carried out in a certain
order, are arranged in numbered lists in this
manual.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
black or blue warning background and space
for a message. If the information on decals of
this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle
could result.
G031593
G031592
If there is a series of illustrations associated
with step-by-step instructions, each step
in the procedure is numbered in the same
way as the corresponding illustration.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
black background. These decals provide general information.
NOTE
The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual
are examples only and are not intended to
be reproductions of the decals actually used
in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indication of how they look and their approximate location in the vehicle. The applicable
information for your particular vehicle can
be found on the respective decals in the
vehicle.
Lists in which letters are used can be found
with series of illustrations in cases where
the order in which the instructions are carried out is not important.
Arrows with or without numbers are used
to indicate the direction of a movement.
If there are no illustrations associated with a
step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure
are indicated by ordinary numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in general overview illustrations in which
certain components are pointed out. The
corresponding number is also used in the
position list's description of the various
components.
9
Introduction
Important information
Bullet lists
Bullets are used to differentiate a number of
components/functions/points of information
that can be listed in random order.
NOTE
•
For example:
• Coolant
• Engine oil
Continued
` `This symbol can be found at the lower right
corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand) page
to indicate that the current topic is continued
on the following page.
Options and accessories
Optional or accessory equipment described in
this manual is indicated by an asterisk.
Optional or accessory equipment may not be
available in all countries or markets. Please
note that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements.
Contact your Volvo retailer for additional information.
10
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are
based on the latest product information
available at the time of publication.
•
Volvo reserves the right to make model
changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and
without incurring obligation.
•
Do not export your Volvo to another
country before investigating that country's applicable safety and emission
control requirements. In some cases it
may be difficult or impossible to comply
with these requirements. Modifications
to the emission control system(s) may
render your Volvo not certifiable for
legal operation in the U.S., Canada and
other countries.
WARNING
If your vehicle is involved in an accident,
unseen damage may affect its drivability
and safety.
WARNING
CALIFORNIA proposition 65
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
WARNING
Certain components of this vehicle such as
air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,
adaptive steering columns, and button cell
batteries may contain Perchlorate material.
Special handling may apply for service or
vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Introduction
Important information
Shiftlock
Fuel filler cap
Vehicle event data (Black box)
When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector
is locked in the P (Park) position. To release the
selector from this position, the ignition must be
in mode II (see page 78) or the engine must
be running. Depress the brake pedal, press the
button on the front side of the gear selector and
move the selector from P (Park).
The fuel filler door, located on the right rear
quarter panel, is connected to your vehicle's
central locking system.
Your vehicle's driving and safety systems
employ computers that monitor, and share
with each other, information about your vehicle's operation. One or more of these computers may store what they monitor, either during
normal vehicle operation or in a crash or nearcrash event. Stored information may be read
and used by:
Keylock
When you switch off the ignition, the gear
selector must be in the P (Park) position before
the remote key can be removed from the ignition slot.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS system performs a brief self-diagnostic test when the engine has been started and
driver releases the brake pedal. Another automatic test may be performed when the vehicle
first reaches a speed of approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several
times and a sound may be audible from the
ABS control module. This is normal.
Fuel filler door
Press the button on the light switch panel (see
the illustration on page 210) when the vehicle
is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door.
Please note that the fuel filler door will remain
unlocked until the vehicle begins to move forward. An audible click will be heard when the
fuel filler door relocks.
Points to keep in mind
• Do not export your Volvo to another country before investigating that country's
applicable safety and exhaust emission
requirements. In some cases it may be difficult or impossible to comply with these
requirements. Modifications to the emission control system(s) may render your
Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in
the U.S., Canada and other countries.
• All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on
the latest product information available at
the time of publication. Please note that
some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements. Optional equipment described in
this manual may not be available in all markets.
•
•
•
•
Volvo Car Corporation
service and repair facilities
law enforcement or government agencies
others who may assert a legal right to
know, or who obtain your consent to know
such information.
• Volvo reserves the right to make model
changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and without incurring obligation.
11
Introduction
Environment
Volvo and the environment
Volvo is committed to the well being of its customers. As a natural part of this commitment,
we care about the environment in which we all
live. Caring for the environment means an
everyday involvement in reducing our environmental impact. Volvo's environmental activities
are based on a holistic view, which means we
consider the overall environmental impact of a
product throughout its complete life cycle. In
this context, design, production, product use,
and recycling are all important considerations.
In production, Volvo has partly or completely
phased out several chemicals including CFCs,
lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and
reduced the number of chemicals used in our
plants 50% since 1991.
Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into
production a three-way catalytic converter with
a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen
sensor, in 1976. The current version of this
highly efficient system reduces emissions of
harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the
exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and
the search to eliminate the remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the only automobile
manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for
the air conditioning system of all models as far
back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced electronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are
bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to
12
continuous environmental refinement of conventional gasoline-powered internal combustion engines, Volvo is actively looking at
advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles.
When you drive a Volvo, you become our partner in the work to lessen the car's impact on
the environment. To reduce your vehicle's
environmental impact, you can:
• Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.
Tests have shown decreased fuel economy with improperly inflated tires.
• Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule in your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet.
• Drive at a constant speed whenever possible.
• See a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible for inspection if the check engine (malfunction indicator) light illuminates, or stays on after the
vehicle has started.
• Properly dispose of any vehicle-related
waste such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake pads, etc.
• When cleaning your vehicle, please use
genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo
car care products are formulated to be
environmentally friendly.
Recycling
As part of Volvo’s commitment to the environment, it is essential for the vehicle to be recycled in an environmentally sound way. Almost
the entire vehicle can be recycled and for that
reason, the vehicle’s final owner is requested
to contact a Volvo retailer for information about
approved and certified recycling facilities.
Introduction
Important warnings
Driver distraction
A driver has a responsibility to do everything
possible to ensure his or her own safety and
the safety of passengers in the vehicle and others sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions
is part of that responsibility.
Driver distraction results from driver activities
that are not directly related to controlling the
vehicle in the driving environment. Your new
Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many feature-rich entertainment and communication
systems. These include hands-free cellular telephones, navigation systems, and multipurpose audio systems. You may also own other
portable electronic devices for your own convenience. When used properly and safely, they
enrich the driving experience. Improperly used,
any of these could cause a distraction.
For all of these systems, we want to provide the
following warning that reflects the strong Volvo
concern for your safety. Never use these devices or any feature of your vehicle in a way that
distracts you from the task of driving safely.
Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In
addition to this general warning, we offer the
following guidance regarding specific newer
features that may be found in your vehicle
• Never use a hand-held cellular telephone
while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit
cellular telephone use by a driver while the
vehicle is moving.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, set and make changes to your
travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked.
• Never program your audio system while
the vehicle is moving. Program radio presets with the vehicle parked, and use your
programmed presets to make radio use
quicker and simpler.
• Never use portable computers or personal
digital assistants while the vehicle is moving.
Accessory installation
• We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
install only genuine, Volvo-approved
accessories, and that accessory installations be performed only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
• Accessories that have not been approved
by Volvo may or may not be specifically
tested for compatibility with your vehicle.
Additionally, an inexperienced installer
may not be familiar with some of your car's
systems.
• Any of your car's performance and safety
systems could be adversely affected if you
install accessories that Volvo has not tested, or if you allow accessories to be installed by someone unfamiliar with your vehicle.
• Damage caused by unapproved or
improperly installed accessories may not
be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
See your Warranty and Service Records
Information booklet for more warranty
information. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that
may result from the installation of non-genuine accessories.
• Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to
ensure compatibility with the performance,
safety, and emission systems in your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician knows where
accessories may and may not be safely
installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please
consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before installing any accessory in or on your vehicle.
13
Occupant safety......................................................................................
Reporting safety defects.........................................................................
Seat belts ...............................................................................................
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ...................................................
Occupant Weight Sensor .......................................................................
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ...................................................
Inflatable Curtain (IC) .............................................................................
Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS...................................................
Crash mode............................................................................................
Child safety.............................................................................................
Child restraint systems...........................................................................
Infant seats..............................................................................................
Convertible seats....................................................................................
Booster cushions....................................................................................
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.................................................................
Top tether anchors..................................................................................
Child restraint registration and recalls....................................................
Child safety locks....................................................................................
14
16
17
18
21
26
30
32
33
35
36
38
40
42
44
45
46
47
48
SAFETY
01 Safety
01
Occupant safety
Volvo's concern for safety
Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern
dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled
off the production line. Three-point seat belts
(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energyabsorbing impact zones were designed into
Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable
or required by government regulation.
We will not compromize our commitment to
safety. We continue to seek out new safety
features and to refine those already in our vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate hearing your suggestions about improving automobile safety. We also want to know if you ever
have a safety concern with your vehicle. Call us
in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:
1-800-663-8255.
Occupant safety reminders
How safely you drive doesn't depend on how
old you are but rather on:
• How well you see.
• Your ability to concentrate.
• How quickly you make decisions under
stress to avoid an accident.
The following suggestions are intended to help
you cope with the ever changing traffic environment.
16
• Never drink and drive.
• If you are taking any medication, consult
your physician about its potential effects
on your driving abilities.
• Take a driver-retraining course.
• Have your eyes checked regularly.
• Keep your windshield and headlights
clean.
• Replace wiper blades when they start to
leave streaks.
• Take into account the traffic, road, and
weather conditions, particularly with
regard to stopping distance.
01 Safety
Reporting safety defects
Reporting safety defects in the U.S.
http://www.safercar.gov
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Volvo Cars of North America, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your retailer, or Volvo
Cars of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at
Volvo strongly recommends that if
your vehicle is covered under a service campaign, safety or emission
recall or similar action, it should be
completed as soon as possible.
Please check with your local retailer
or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
if your vehicle is covered under these
conditions.
01
Reporting safety defects in Canada
If you believe your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars
of Canada Corp.
To contact Transport Canada, call
(800) 333 – 0510, or (613) 993 – 9851 if you are
calling from the Ottawa region.
NHTSA can be reached at:
Internet:
http://www.nhtsa.gov
Telephone:
1-888-DASH-2-DOT
(1-888-327-4236).
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from:
17
01 Safety
01
Seat belts
General information
in the event of a collision, limits the peak forces
exerted by the seat belt on the occupant.
Fastening a seat belt
Buckling
Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch
plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is
heard. The seat belt retractor is normally
"unlocked" and you can move freely, provided
that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.
NOTE
Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt)
is equipped with the ALR/ELR function,
which is designed to help keep the seat belt
taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is
pulled out as far as possible. If this is done,
a sound from the seat belt retractor will be
audible, which is normal, and the seat belt
will be pulled taut and locked in place. This
function is automatically disabled when the
seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted.
Seat belt retractor
The seat belt retractor will lock up in the following situations:
Adjusting the seat belt
Seat belts should always be worn by all occupants of your vehicle. Children should be properly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster
seat determined by age, weight and height.
Volvo also believes no child should sit in the
front seat of a vehicle.
Most states and provinces make it mandatory
for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.
Seat belt pretensioners
All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners
that reduce slack in the belts. These pretensioners are triggered in situations where the
front or side impact airbags deploy, and in certain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts
also include a tension reducing device which,
18
•
•
•
•
•
if the belt is pulled out rapidly
during braking and acceleration
if the vehicle is leaning excessively
when driving in turns
if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is activated
See also page See page 37 for information
about using a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to
anchor a child seat.
When wearing the seat belt remember:
• The belt should not be twisted or turned.
• The lap section of the belt must be positioned low on the hips (not pressing against
the abdomen).
• Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled
up into its retractor and that the shoulder
and lap belts are taut.
Unbuckling the seat belt
To remove the seat belt, press the red section
on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the
vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully
after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the
belt back into the retractor slot.
01 Safety
Seat belts
Check periodically that the seat belts are in
good condition. Use water and a mild detergent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism
function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull
rapidly on the strap.
WARNING
•
Never repair the belt yourself; have this
work done by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician only.
•
Any device used to induce slack into the
shoulder belt portion of the three-point
belt system will have a detrimental
effect on the amount of protection available to you in the event of a collision.
•
The seat back should not be tilted too
far back. The shoulder belt must be taut
in order to function properly.
•
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children who have outgrown these
devices sit in the rear seat with the seat
belt properly fastened.
WARNING
Never use a seat belt for more than one
occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion
of the belt under the arm, behind the back
or otherwise out of position. Such use could
cause injury in the event of an accident. As
seat belts lose much of their strength when
exposed to violent stretching, they should
be replaced after any collision, even if they
appear to be undamaged.
Seat belt reminder
G017726
Seat belt maintenance
01
Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console
The seat belt reminder consists of an audible
signal, an indicator light near the rearview mirror and a symbol in the instrument panel that
alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their
seat belts. The audible signal and indicator
light will be on for a total of 6 seconds from the
time the ignition is switched on, regardless of
whether or not the seat belts are fastened.
If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the
vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and
warning light will be active for a total of 6 seconds.
Rear seats
The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two
additional functions:
``
19
01 Safety
01
Seat belts
• It provides information about which seat
Seat belt use during pregnancy
a distance as possible between their belly and
the steering wheel.
belts are fastened in the rear seat. A message will appear in the information display
when a belt is being used. This message
will disappear after approximately 6 seconds or can be erased by pressing the
READ button on the left steering wheel
lever.
Child seats
Please refer to page 38 for information on
securing child seats with the seat belts.
occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled
his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in
motion. A visual and audible signal will be
given. These signals will stop when the
seat belt has been re-buckled or can be
stopped by pressing the READ button.
• The message Unbelted in rear seat will
appear in the information display if one of
the rear doors has been opened.
The message in the information display can
always be accessed, even if it has been erased,
by pressing the READ button to display stored
messages.
G020998
• It also provides a reminder if one of the
The seat belt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way. The diagonal section should wrap
over the shoulder then be routed between the
breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap
section should lay flat over the thighs and as
low as possible under the belly. It must never
be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack
from the belt and ensure that it fits close to the
body without any twists.
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means they must
be able to easily operate the foot pedals and
steering wheel). Within this context, they
should strive to position the seat with as large
20
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
General information
properly, the general warning symbol illuminates and a text message will be displayed.
See also page 72 and page 74 for more
information about indicator and warning symbols.
WARNING
G022831
•
Warning symbols in the instrument panel
As an enhancement to the three-point seat
belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS
consists of seat belt pretensioners, front airbags, side impact airbags, a front passenger
occupant weight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All of these systems are monitored by the
SRS control module. An SRS warning light in
the instrument panel (see the illustration) illuminates when the ignition is in modes I, II, or
III, and will normally go out after approximately
6 seconds if no faults are detected in the system.
•
If the SRS warning light stays on after
the engine has started or if it illuminates
while you are driving, have the vehicle
inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician as soon as
possible.
Never try to repair any component or
part of the SRS yourself. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction and serious injury. All work on
these systems should be performed by
a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
01
WARNING
If your vehicle has been subjected to flood
conditions (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing
water on the floor of the vehicle) or if your
vehicle has become flood-damaged in any
way, do not attempt to start the vehicle or
insert the remote key into the ignition slot
before disconnecting the battery (see
below). This may cause airbag deployment
which could result in personal injury. Have
the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for repairs.
Automatic transmission:
Before attempting to tow the vehicle:
1. Switch off the ignition for at least
10 minutes and disconnect the battery.
2. Follow the instructions for manually
overriding the shiftlock system on page
113.
Please be aware that overriding the shiftlock
system does not release the steering wheel
lock.
Where applicable, a text message will also be
displayed when the SRS warning light illuminates. If this warning symbol is not functioning
``
21
01 Safety
01
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Front airbags
The passenger's side front airbag is folded
behind a panel located above the glove compartment.
G018665
WARNING
The front airbag system
The front airbags supplement the three-point
seat belts. For these airbags to provide the
protection intended, seat belts must be worn
at all times.
The front airbag system includes gas generators surrounded by the airbags, and deceleration sensors that activate the gas generators,
causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen
gas.
Location of the passenger's side front airbag
As the movement of the seats' occupants compresses the airbags, some of the gas is expelled at a controlled rate to provide better cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also
deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire
process, including inflation and deflation of the
airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a second.
The location of the front airbags is indicated by
SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel
pad and above the glove compartment, and by
decals on both sun visors and on the front and
far right side of the dash.
The driver's side front airbag is folded and
located in the steering wheel hub.
22
•
The airbags in the vehicle are designed
to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replacement for–the three-point seat belts. For
maximum protection, wear seat belts at
all times. Be aware that no system can
prevent all possible injuries that may
occur in an accident.
•
Never drive with your hands on the
steering wheel pad/airbag housing.
•
The front airbags are designed to help
prevent serious injury. Deployment
occurs very quickly and with considerable force. During normal deployment
and depending on variables such as
seating position, one may experience
abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other
injuries as a result from deployment of
one or both of the airbags.
•
When installing any accessory equipment, make sure that the front airbag
system is not damaged. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction.
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Front airbag deployment
• The front airbags are designed to deploy
during certain frontal or front-angular collisions, impacts, or decelerations, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and
object impacted. The airbags may also
deploy in certain non-frontal collisions
where rapid deceleration occurs.
• The SRS sensors, which trigger the front
airbags, are designed to react to both the
impact of the collision and the inertial
forces generated by it, and to determine if
the intensity of the collision is sufficient for
the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags
to be deployed.
However, not all frontal collisions activate the
front airbags.
• If the collision involves a nonrigid object
(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed
object at a low speed, the front airbags will
not necessarily deploy.
• Front airbags do not normally deploy in a
side impact collision, in a collision from the
rear or in a rollover situation.
• The amount of damage to the bodywork
does not reliably indicate if the airbags
should have deployed or not.
•
•
•
WARNING
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) in height who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened1.
1-800-458-1552
Never drive with the airbags deployed.
The fact that they hang out can impair
the steering of your vehicle. Other
safety systems can also be damaged.
175 Gordon Baker Road
The smoke and dust formed when the
airbags are deployed can cause skin
and eye irritation in the event of prolonged exposure.
www.volvocanada.com
01
www.volvocars.us
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
North York, Ontario M2H 2N7
1-800-663-8255
Should you have questions about any component in the SRS system, please contact a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
or Volvo customer support:
In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914
1
See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information see page 26.
``
23
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
NOTE
•
•
•
Airbag decals
Deployment of front airbags occurs only
one time during an accident. In a collision where deployment occurs, the airbags and seat belt pretensioners activate. Some noise occurs and a small
amount of powder is released. The
release of the powder may appear as
smoke-like matter. This is a normal
characteristic and does not indicate fire.
Volvo's front airbags use special sensors that are integrated with the front
seat buckles. The point at which the airbag deploys is determined by whether
or not the seat belt is being used, as well
as the severity of the collision.
Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors
Collisions can occur where only one of
the airbags deploys. If the impact is less
severe, but severe enough to present a
clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered at partial capacity. If the impact is
more severe, the airbags are triggered
at full capacity.
Passenger's side airbag decal
24
WARNING
•
Children must never be allowed in the
front passenger's seat.
•
Occupants in the front passenger's seat
must never sit on the edge of the seat,
sit leaning toward the instrument panel
or otherwise sit out of position.
•
The occupant's back must be as upright
as comfort allows and be against the
seat back with the seat belt properly
fastened.
•
Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on
the dash, seat or out of the window.
G008335
01
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
01
WARNING
•
No objects or accessory equipment,
e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed
on, attached to, or installed near the air
bag hatch (the area above the glove
compartment) or the area affected by
airbag deployment (see the illustration
on page 22).
•
There should be no loose articles, such
as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or
dashboard area.
•
Never try to open the airbag cover on
the steering wheel or the passenger's
side dashboard. This should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
•
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occupants.
25
01 Safety
01
Occupant Weight Sensor
General information
The OWS works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of
a properly seated occupant and determine if
the passenger's side front airbag should be
enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not
inflate).
2
The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag when:
• the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,
G017724
2
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light
Disabling the passenger's side front
airbag
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults
and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any
vehicle with a front passenger side airbag, and
be properly restrained for their size and weight.
For child safety recommendations, see
page 37.
The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is
designed to meet the regulatory requirements
of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will
not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag
under certain conditions.
26
or has small/medium objects in the front
seat,
• the system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat that is
installed according to the manufacturer's
instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint
that is installed according to the manufacturer's instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat,
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time,
• a child or a small person occupies the front
passenger's seat.
The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on
to remind you that the passenger's side front
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead
console, near the base of the rearview mirror.
NOTE
When the ignition is switched on, the OWS
indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds
while the system performs a self-diagnostic
test.
However, if a fault is detected in the system:
• The OWS indicator light will stay on
• The SRS warning light (see page 21) will
come on and stay on
• The message Pass. Airbag OFF Service
urgent will be displayed in the information
display.
WARNING
If a fault in the system is detected and indicated as described, be aware that the passenger's side front airbag will not deploy in
the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS
system and Occupant Weight Sensor
should be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as
possible.
01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor
WARNING
•
•
Never try to open, remove, or repair any
components in the OWS system. This
could result in system malfunction.
Maintenance or repairs should only be
carried out by an a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
The front passenger's seat should not
be modified in any way. This could
reduce pressure on the seat cushion,
which might interfere with the OWS system's function.
Passenger's seat
occupancy status
OWS indicator light
status
Passenger's side
front airbag status
Seat unoccupied
OWS indicator light
lights up.
Passenger's
side front
airbag disabled
Seat occupied by low
weight
occupant/
objectA
OWS indicator light
lights up
Passenger's
side front
airbag disabled
Seat occupied by
heavy occupant/object
OWS indicator light is
not lit
01
BAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain
off.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that
the person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in an upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
A
Passenger's
side front
airbag enabled
Volvo recommends that children always be properly
restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do
not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled
unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.
Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is
any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear seat.
The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)
the passenger's side front airbag in the event
of a collision anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the
front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIR-
centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the passenger's frontal airbag.
• If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp remains on even after this, the person
should be advised to ride in the rear seat.
This condition reflects limitations of the OWS
classification capability. It does not indicate
OWS malfunction.
Modifications
If you are considering modifying your vehicle in
any way to accommodate a disability, for
example by altering or adapting the driver's or
front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please contact Volvo at:
``
27
01 Safety
01
Occupant Weight Sensor
In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
WARNING
•
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
In Canada
•
The seat belt should never be wrapped
around an object on the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the
OWS system's function.
•
The front passenger's seat belt should
never be used in a way that exerts more
pressure on the passenger than normal.
This could increase the pressure exerted on the weight sensor by a child, and
could result in the airbag being enabled,
which might cause it to deploy in the
event of a collision, thereby injuring the
child.
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario
M2H 2N7
1-800-663-8255
28
No objects that add to the total weight
on the seat should be placed on the
front passenger's seat. If a child is
seated in the front passenger's seat
with any additional weight, this extra
weight could cause the OWS system to
enable the airbag, which might cause it
to deploy in the event of a collision,
thereby injuring the child.
WARNING
•
Keep the following points in mind with
respect to the OWS system. Failure to
follow these instructions could
adversely affect the system's function
and result in serious injury to the occupant of the front passenger's seat:
•
The full weight of the front seat passenger should always be on the seat cushion. The passenger should never lift
him/herself off the seat cushion using
the armrest in the door or the center
console, by pressing the feet on the
floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat
cushion, or by pressing against the
backrest in a way that reduces pressure
on the seat cushion. This could cause
OWS to disable the front, passenger's
side airbag.
01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor
01
WARNING
•
Do not place any type of object on the
front passenger's seat in such a way
that jamming, pressing, or squeezing
occurs between the object and the front
seat, other than as a direct result of the
correct use of the Automatic Locking
Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see page 37).
•
No objects should be placed under the
front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function.
29
01 Safety
01
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags
General information
NOTE
SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs
only on the side of the vehicle affected by
the impact. The airbags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations.
G024377
G032949
Components in the SIPS airbag system
Driver's side SIPS airbag
Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front
seats only)
The SIPS airbag system is designed to help
increase occupant protection in the event of
certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
30
G024378
As an enhancement to the structural side
impact protection built into your vehicle, it is
also equipped with Side Impact Protection
System (SIPS) airbags.
Passenger's side SIPS airbag
SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs
only on the side of the vehicle affected by the
impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy
in all side impact situations.
This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas generator, the side airbag modules built into the
outboard sides of both front seat backrests,
and electronic sensors/wiring.
01 Safety
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags
01
WARNING
•
The SIPS airbag system is a supplement to the structural Side Impact Protection System and the three-point seat
belt system. It is not designed to deploy
during collisions from the front or rear of
the vehicle or in rollover situations.
•
The use of seat covers on the front seats
may impede SIPS airbag deployment.
•
No objects, accessory equipment or
stickers may be placed on, attached to
or installed near the SIPS airbag system
or in the area affected by SIPS airbag
deployment.
•
Never try to open or repair any components of the SIPS airbag system. This
should be done only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
•
In order for the SIPS airbag to provide
its best protection, both front seat
occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened.
•
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the occupants of the
vehicle in the event of an accident.
31
01 Safety
01
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
General information
This system consists of inflatable curtains
located along the sides of the roof liners,
stretching from the center of both front side
windows to the rear edge of the rear side door
windows. It is designed to help protect the
heads of the occupants of the front seats and
the occupant of the outboard rear seating positions in certain side impact collisions.
In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Curtain (IC) and the Side Impact Airbag System
(SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the SIPS
airbag deploy simultaneously.
NOTE
If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains
inflated for approximately 3 seconds.
32
WARNING
•
The IC system is a supplement to the
Side Impact Protection System. It is not
designed to deploy during collisions
from the front or rear of the vehicle or in
rollover situations.
•
Never try to open or repair any components of the IC system. This should be
done only by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
•
Never hang heavy items from the ceiling
handles. This could impede deployment
of the Inflatable Curtain.
•
The rear seat should not be loaded to a
level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the
upper edge of the rear side windows.
Objects placed higher than this level
could impede the function of the Inflatable Curtain.
WARNING
In order for the IC to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants and both
outboard rear seat occupants should sit in
an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened; adults using the seat belt and
children using the proper child restraint system. Only adults should sit in the front seats.
Children must never be allowed in the front
passenger seat, see page 37 for guidelines. Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an
accident.
01 Safety
Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS
General information
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) –
front seats only
The WHIPS system consists of specially
designed hinges and brackets on the front seat
backrests designed to help absorb some of the
energy generated in a collision from the rear
(when the vehicle is rear-ended).
In the event of a collision of this type, the hinges
and brackets of the front seat backrests are
designed to change position slightly to allow
the backrest/head restraint to help support the
occupant's head before moving slightly rearward. This movement helps absorb some of
the forces that could result in whiplash.
01
WARNING
•
Occupants in the front seats must never
sit out of position. The occupant's back
must be as upright as comfort allows
and be against the seat back with the
seat belt properly fastened.
•
If your vehicle has been involved in a
rear-end collision, the front seat backrests must be inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician, even
if the seats appear to be undamaged.
Certain components in the WHIPS system may need to be replaced.
•
Do not attempt to service any component in the WHIPS system yourself.
The WHIPS system is designed to supplement the other safety systems in
your vehicle. For this system to function
properly, the three-point seat belt must
be worn. Please be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that
may occur in an accident.
•
The WHIPS system is designed to function in certain collisions from the rear,
depending on the crash severity, angle
and speed.
G021018
•
G021842
WARNING
``
33
01 Safety
01
Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS
WARNING
WARNING
•
If the rear seat backrests are folded
down, cargo must be secured to prevent it from sliding forward against the
front seat backrests in the event of a
collision from the rear. This could interfere with the action of the WHIPS system.
G018567
•
Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind
the front seats could impede the function of the WHIPS system.
34
Any contact between the front seat backrests and the folded rear seat or a rear-facing
child seat could impede the function of the
WHIPS system. If the rear seat is folded
down, the occupied front seats must be
adjusted forward so that they do not touch
the folded rear seat.
01 Safety
Crash mode
function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines,
sensors for one of the safety systems, the
brake system, etc.
G022831
WARNING
•
Never attempt to repair the vehicle
yourself or to reset the electrical system
after the vehicle has displayed Safety
mode See manual. This could result in
injury or improper system function.
•
Restoring the vehicle to normal operating status should only be done by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Driving after a collision
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision,
the text Safety mode See manual may
appear in the information display. This indicates that the vehicle's functionality has been
reduced.
•
After Safety mode See manual has
been displayed, if you detect the odor
of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel
leakage, do not attempt to start the
vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately.
NOTE
This text can only be shown if the display is
undamaged and the vehicle's electrical system is intact.
Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if one
or more of the safety systems (e.g. front or side
airbags, an inflatable curtain, or one or more of
the seat belt pretensioners) has deployed. The
collision may have damaged an important
01
3. Try to start the vehicle.
Moving the vehicle
If the electrical system is able to reset system
status to normal (Safety mode See manual
will no longer be shown in the display), the
vehicle may be moved carefully from its present position, if for example, it is blocking traffic.
It should, however, not be moved farther than
is absolutely necessary.
WARNING
Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable
after Safety mode has been set, it should
not be driven or towed (pulled by another
vehicle). There may be concealed damage
that could make it difficult or impossible to
control. The vehicle should be transported
on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection/
repairs.
Attempting to start the vehicle
If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is
no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the
vehicle. To do so:
1. Remove the remote control from the ignition slot.
2. Reinsert the remote in the ignition slot. The
vehicle will then attempt to reset Safety
mode to normal status.
35
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Children should be seated safely
Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint
systems for all occupants including children.
Remember that, regardless of age and size, a
child should always be properly restrained in a
vehicle.
Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/
LATCH attachments, which make it more convenient to install child seats.
Some restraint systems for children are
designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap
belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
Such child restraint systems can help protect
children in vehicles in the event of an accident
only if they are used properly. However, children could be endangered in a crash if the child
restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle. Failure to follow the installation instructions
for your child restraint can result in your child
striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop.
Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable
substitute for a child restraint system. In an
accident, a child held in a person's arms can
be crushed between the vehicle's interior and
an unrestrained person. The child could also be
injured by striking the interior, or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver
or impact. The same can also happen if the
infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat.
Other occupants should also be properly
36
restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring
or increasing the injury of a child.
All states and provinces have legislation governing how and where children should be carried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations existing in your state or province. Recent accident
statistics have shown that children are safer in
rear seating positions than front seating positions when properly restrained. A child restraint
system can help protect a child in a vehicle.
Here's what to look for when selecting a child
restraint system:
It should have a label certifying that it meets
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada,
CMVSS 213.
Make sure the child restraint system is
approved for the child's height, weight and
development – the label required by the standard or regulation, or instructions for infant
restraints, typically provide this information.
In using any child restraint system, we urge you
to carefully look over the instructions that are
provided with the restraint. Be sure you understand them and can use the device properly
and safely in this vehicle. A misused child
restraint system can result in increased injuries
for both the infant or child and other occupants
in the vehicle.
When a child has outgrown the child safety
seat, you should use the rear seat with the
standard seat belt fastened. The best way to
help protect the child here is to place the child
on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly
located on the hips (see the illustration on page
44). Legislation in your state or province may
mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in
combination with the seat belt, depending on
the child's age and/or size. Please check local
regulations.
A specially designed and tested booster cushion and backrest can be obtained from your
Volvo retailer.
USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs.
(15 – 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm)
in height
Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs.
(18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm)
in height
01 Safety
Child safety
WARNING
•
•
•
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children under 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) in height who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened.
Keep vehicle doors and trunk locked
and keep remote controls out of a
child’s reach. Unsupervised children
could lock themselves in an open trunk
and risk injury. Children should be
taught not to play in vehicles.
On hot days, the temperature in the
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure to these high temperatures
for even a short period of time can
cause heat-related injury or death.
Small children are particularly at risk.
Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/
ELR)
To make child seat installation easier, each
seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with a locking mechanism to help keep the
seat belt taut.
When attaching the seat belt to a child
seat:
Volvo has some very specific
recommendations:
1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat
according to the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
• Always wear your seat belt.
• Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.
3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the
buckle (lock) in the usual way.
01
device which, when used with a threepoint seat belt can help reduce serious
injuries during certain types of accidents.
Volvo recommends that you do not disconnect the airbag system in your vehicle.
4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around
the child seat.
• Volvo strongly recommends that everyone
A sound from the seat belt retractor will be
audible at this time and is normal. The belt will
now be locked in place. This function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is
unlocked and the belt is fully retracted.
• Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
in the vehicle be properly restrained.
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back
seat of any vehicle with a front passenger
side airbag.
Drive safely!
Volvo's recommendations
Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit
in the front seat of a vehicle? It's quite simple
really. A front airbag is a very powerful device
designed, by law, to help protect an adult.
Because of the size of the airbag and its speed
of inflation, a child should never be placed in
the front seat, even if he or she is properly belted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo
has been an innovator in safety for over seventy-five years, and we'll continue to do our
part. But we need your help. Please remember
to put your children in the back seat, and
buckle them up.
37
01 Safety
01
Child restraint systems
Convertible seat
G023269
G022847
G022840
Child restraints
Booster cushion
Infant seat
There are three main types of child restraint
systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and
booster cushions. They are classified according to the child's age and size.
The following section provides general information on securing a child restraint using a
three-point seat belt. Refer to page 45–46
for information on securing a child restraint
using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top
tether anchorages.
38
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause the
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this position.
WARNING
Always refer to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for detailed information
on securing the restraint.
01 Safety
Child restraint systems
01
WARNING
•
When not in use, keep the child restraint
system secured or remove it from the
passenger compartment to help prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop or collision.
•
A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its
neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel,
properly restrained, facing rearward. In
addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible.
39
01 Safety
01
Infant seats
WARNING
G023270
G022844
Securing an infant seat with a seat belt
Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat
Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's seat
NOTE
Refer to page 45–46 for information on
securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/
LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether
anchorages.
WARNING
•
An infant seat must be in the rear-facing
position only.
•
The infant seat should not be positioned
behind the driver's seat unless there is
adequate space for safe installation.
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause the
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this position.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
40
G023271
1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the
vehicle.
Fasten the seat belt
01 Safety
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt
Ensure that the seat is securely in place
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the belt's
automatic locking function.
6. Push and pull the infant seat along the seat
belt path to ensure that it is held securely
in place by the seat belt.
NOTE
01
G022850
G022846
Infant seats
WARNING
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)
in any direction along the seat belt path.
5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the
seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound
from the seat belt retractor's automatic
locking function will be audible at this time
and is normal. The seat belt should now be
locked in place.
The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling
the seat belt and letting it retract completely.
41
01 Safety
01
Convertible seats
Securing a convertible seat with a seat
belt
G018630
G022847
WARNING
Do not place the convertible seat in the front passenger's seat
NOTE
Refer to pages 45 and 46 for information
on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/
LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether
anchorages.
Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending
on the age and size of the child.
42
Route the seat belt through the convertible seat
WARNING
Always use a convertible seat that is suitable for the child's age and size. See the convertible seat manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat
of the vehicle.
•
A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its
neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel,
properly restrained, facing rearward. In
addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible.
•
Convertible child seats should be installed in the rear seat only.
•
A rear-facing convertible seat should not
be positioned behind the driver's seat
unless there is adequate space for safe
installation.
2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
01 Safety
Convertible seats
01
G022850
G022848
time and is normal. The seat belt should
now be locked in place.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the belt's
automatic locking function.
G022849
Fasten the seat belt
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt
6. Push and pull the convertible seat along
the seat belt path to ensure that it is held
securely in place by the seat belt.
WARNING
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,
let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A
sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)
in any direction along the seat belt path.
Ensure that the seat is securely in place
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity
of an accident were to cause the airbag to
inflate, this could lead to serious injury or
death to a child seated in this position.
The convertible seat can be removed by
unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract
completely.
43
01 Safety
01
Booster cushions
Position the child correctly on the booster cushion
Booster cushions are recommended for children who have outgrown convertible seats.
1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat
of the vehicle.
2. With the child properly seated on the
booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or
around the cushion according to the manufacturer's instructions.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
44
G022852
G022851
Securing a booster cushion
Positioning the seat belt
4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and
fits snugly around the child.
WARNING
•
The hip section of the three-point seat
belt must fit snugly across the child's
hips, not across the stomach.
•
The shoulder section of the three-point
seat belt should be positioned across
the chest and shoulder.
•
The shoulder belt must never be placed
behind the child's back or under the
arm.
01 Safety
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child
seat anchors
01
3. Fasten the attachment on the child
restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/
LATCH/LATCH lower anchors.
4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped
child seats are located in the rear, outboard
seats, hidden below the backrest cushions.
Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the
anchor positions as shown. To access the
anchors, kneel on the seat cushion and locate
the anchors by feel. Always follow your child
seat manufacturer's installation instructions,
and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
and top tethers whenever possible.
To access the anchors
1. Put the child restraint in position.
2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down
the seat cushion and locate the anchors by
feel.
G018631
WARNING
Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to
FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to
the child restraint system's manual for
weight and size ratings.
Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/
LATCH lower anchors
NOTE
•
The rear seat's center position is not
equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower
anchors. When installing a child
restraint in this position, attach the
restraint's top tether strap (if it is so
equipped) to the top tether anchorage
point and secure the restraint with the
vehicle's center seat belt.
•
Always follow your child seat manufacturer's installation instructions, and use
both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and
top tethers whenever possible.
WARNING
•
Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly to the anchor (see the illustration).
If the attachment is not correctly fastened, the child restraint may not be
properly secured in the event of a collision.
•
The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint
anchors are only intended for use with
child seats positioned in the outboard
seating positions. These anchors are
not certified for use with any child
restraint that is positioned in the center
seating position. When securing a child
restraint in the center seating position,
use only the vehicle's center seat belt.
45
01 Safety
01
Top tether anchors
Child restraint anchorages
child restraint using the Automatic Locking
Retractor seat belt (see page 37).
5. Firmly tension all straps.
Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's
instructions for information on securing the
child seat.
WARNING
Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top
tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are
located on the rear parcel shelf.
•
Never route a top tether strap over the
top of the head restraint. The strap
should be routed beneath the head
restraint.
•
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly fitted child restraints. Under
no circumstances are they to be used
for adult seat belts or harnesses. The
anchorages are not able to withstand
excessive forces on them in the event of
collision if full harness seat belts or adult
seat belts are installed to them. An adult
who uses a belt anchored in a child
restraint anchorage runs a great risk of
suffering severe injuries should a collision occur.
•
Do not install rear speakers that require
the removal of the top tether anchors or
interfere with the proper use of the top
tether strap.
Securing a child seat
1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.
2. Fold up the plastic cover over the anchorage to be used.
3. Route the top tether strap under the head
restraint and attach it to the anchor.
4. Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISOFIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint is
not equipped with lower tether straps, or
the restraint is used in the center seating
position, follow instructions for securing a
46
01 Safety
Child restraint registration and recalls
01
Registering a child restraint
Child restraints could be recalled for safety
reasons. You must register your child restraint
to be reached in a recall. To stay informed
about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out
and return the registration card that comes
with new child restraints.
Child restraint recall information is readily available in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall
information in the U.S., call the U.S. Government's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393.
In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child
Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.
47
01 Safety
01
Child safety locks
G021077
Child safety locks
Child safety locks – rear doors
The controls are located on the rear door
jambs. Use the remote control's key blade or a
screwdriver to adjust these controls.
The rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the slot is in the horizontal position.
The rear doors can be opened from the
inside when the slot is in the vertical position.
48
01 Safety
01
49
Remote key and key blade.....................................................................
Valet locking ...........................................................................................
Keyless drive...........................................................................................
Locks.......................................................................................................
Alarm.......................................................................................................
50
52
59
60
63
66
LOCKS AND ALARM
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
Introduction
02
Two remote keys or optional Personal Car
Communicators (PCC) are provided with your
vehicle. They enable you to unlock the doors
and trunk, and also function as ignition keys to
start the vehicle or operate electrical components. The remote keys contain detachable
metal key blades for manually locking or
unlocking the driver's door and the glove compartment. Up to six remotes can be programmed for use on the same vehicle.
The PCCs have enhanced functionality compared with the standard remote key.
NOTE
In the remainder of this chapter, all references to the remote key also pertain to the
PCC unless otherwise stated.
WARNING
Never leave the remote key in the ignition if
children are to remain in the vehicle.
Detachable key blade
Each remote key or PCC contains a detachable
metal key blade for mechanically locking or
unlocking the driver's door and the glove compartment, and to enable the valet locking function. See page 56 for more information on the
key blade and page see page 59 for informa-
52
tion on the valet locking function. The key
blades have a unique code, which is used if
new ones need to be produced. This code is
available at an authorized Volvo retailer.
Loss of a remote key
If either of the remote keys is lost, the other
should be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer.
As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost
remote key must be erased from the system.
The number of registered keys for the vehicle
can be found in the vehicle's menu under Car
settings
Car key memory
Number of keys. See page 122 for a description of the menu system.
USA-5WK49264
FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO
5WK49236
FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266
NOTE
Additional or duplicate remote control keys
can be obtained from any Authorized Volvo
Retailer.
You can also obtain additional or duplicate
remote control keys from certain independent repair facilities and locksmiths that are
qualified to make remote control keys. Each
key must be programmed to work with your
vehicle.
California Only:
A list of independent repair facilities and/or
locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and
code replacement keys can be found:
FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO
5WK49233
FCC ID:KR55WK49233
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the
following conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Canada-5WK49264
IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO
5WK49236
•
on the Volvo website at
http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys
IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266
•
by calling Volvo Customer Care at
1-800-458-1552
IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO
5WK49233
IC:267T-5WK49233
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Key memory: door mirrors and driver's
seat
The position of the side door mirrors and power
driver's seat are stored in the remote keys
when the vehicle is locked. The next time the
driver's door is unlocked with the same remote
key and the door is opened within 2 minutes,
the power driver's seat and side door mirrors
will automatically move to the position that they
were in when the doors were most recently
locked with the same remote key. See page
81 for more information.
This feature can be activated or deactivated in
the vehicle's menu under Car settings
Car key memory
Seat & mirror
positions. See page 122 for a description of
the menu system.
See also page 60 for information regarding
vehicles with the optional keyless drive.
Confirmation when locking/unlocking
the vehicle
When the vehicle is locked with a remote key,
the turn signals will flash once to confirm that
this has been completed correctly.
• Locking: turn signals flash once
• Unlocking: turn signals flash twice
When the vehicle is locked, confirmation will
only be given if all of the locks are locked after
the doors have been closed.
NOTE
If you do not receive confirmation when
locking the vehicle, check whether a door or
the trunk is ajar, or if this feature has been
turned off in the menu.
ing messages (which may appear in the instrument panel display) are related to the immobilizer:
Message
Meaning
Key error Reinsert
key
Remote key not recognized during start.
Try to start the vehicle again.
Car key not found
PCC with keyless
drive only. Remote
key not recognized
during start. Try to
start the vehicle
again.
Making a setting
This function can be activated or deactivated
under Car settings
Light settings
Lock confirmation light or Car settings
Light settings
Unlock
confirmation light. See page 122 for a
description of the menu system.
If the problem continues, insert the
remote key into the
ignition slot and try
to start the vehicle
again.
Immobilizer (start inhibitor)
Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle
contains a coded transponder. The code in the
key is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition
slot where it is compared to the code stored in
the start inhibitor module. The vehicle will start
only with a properly coded key. If you misplace
a key, take the other keys to a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician for reprogramming as an anti-theft measure. The follow-
02
Immobilizer Try
start again
Remote key fault
during start. Contact
an authorized Volvo
workshop.
``
53
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
CAUTION
Never use force when inserting the remote
key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot
be started if the transponder is damaged.
02
USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following condition: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Buttons on the remote
NOTE
The remote key's range is normally approximately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle.
See page 57 for information on replacing the
battery.
Common functions: Remote key/
Personal Car Communicator (PCC)*
This function can be changed so that all doors
unlock at the same time under Car settings
Lock settings
Doors unlock. See
page 122 for a description of the menu system.
G021079
Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
See page 108 for information on starting the
vehicle.
Personal Car Communicator (PCC)*
The batteries should be replaced if:
Lock
• The information symbol illuminates and
Unlock
•
Replace car key battery is shown in the
display and/or
if the locks do not react after several
attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle.
Approach lighting
Trunk unlock/open
Panic alarm
54
Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the
remote once to unlock the driver's door.
After a short pause, press the Unlock button a
second time within 10 seconds to unlock the
other doors and the trunk.
Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO
Replacing the battery in the remote key
Lock – Press the Lock button on the
remote once to lock all doors and the trunk.
The turn signals will flash once to confirm locking.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Approach lighting – As you approach the
vehicle, press the button on the remote key to
light the interior lighting, parking lights, license
plate lighting and the lights in the door mirrors*.
These lights will switch off automatically after
30, 60 or 90 seconds. See page 122 for a
description of the menu system.
Unlock/open trunk
Press once: This unlocks the trunk (but does
not open it) and disarms the alarm and optional
movement sensor (the alarm indicator light on
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
the dashboard will go out). If the trunk is not
opened within two minutes it will automatically
relock and the alarm will be rearmed.
Press twice: This both unlocks the trunk and
pops it open slightly.
NOTE
Any excess weight (snow, etc.) on the trunk
lid may prevent it from opening.
See also page 64 for information on opening
the trunk from the passenger compartment.
Range
Using the information button
The remote key has a range of approximately
60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle.
1. Press the information button
NOTE
Buildings or other obstacles may interfere
with the function of the remote key. The
vehicle can also be locked or unlocked with
the key blade, see page 56.
If none of the indicator lights flash when the
information button has been pressed several times from different places in relation to
the vehicle, contact an authorized Volvo
service technician.
Panic alarm – This button can be used to
attract attention during emergency situations.
The indicator lights (2) provide information
according to the illustration:
G021080
To activate the panic alarm, press and hold this
button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice
within 3 seconds. The turn signals and horn will
be activated. The panic alarm will stop automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
The Panic alarm button will not unlock the vehicle.
02
2. All of the indicator lights will flash sequentially for approximately 7 seconds to indicate that the PCC is receiving information
from the vehicle. If any of the buttons are
pressed during this 7-second period,
transmission of information to the PCC will
be interrupted.
NOTE
Unique functions—PCC*
After closing, the trunk will not automatically
relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm the
alarm.
To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds
and press the button again.
.
Information button
Indicator lights
Pressing the information button provides certain information about the vehicle with the help
of the indicator lights.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
55
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
NOTE
02
Steady green light: the vehicle is correctly
locked.
•
The approach lighting, panic alarm, and
the functions controlled by the information button have a range of approximately 300 ft (100 m) from the vehicle.
•
Radio waves, buildings or other obstacles may interfere with the function of
the PCC.
If the vehicle does not provide confirmation
when a button has been pressed, try moving
closer and pressing the button again.
Range
The PCC's lock and unlock functions have a
range of approximately 60 ft. (20 m) from the
vehicle.
If more than one PCC is used to lock/unlock
the vehicle, only the one used most recently will
show the correct locking status.
Steady red light: the alarm has been triggered.
Both red lights flash alternatively: the alarm
was triggered less than 5 minutes ago.
Keyless drive
Vehicles equipped with the optional Personal
Car Communicator have the keyless drive
function, see page 60 for detailed information.
Outside of the PCC´s range
If the PCC is more than approximately 300 ft
(100 m) from the vehicle when the information
button is pressed, no new information will be
received. The PCC most recently used to lock
or unlock the vehicle will show the vehicle's
most recently received status. The indicator
lights will not flash when the information button
is pressed while the PCC is out of range.
Steady yellow light: the vehicle is not
locked.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lights illuminate when
the information button is pressed, this may
be because the most recent transmission
between the vehicle and the PCC was interrupted or impeded by buildings or other
objects.
Detachable key blade
The key blade can be removed from the remote
key. When removed, the key blade can be used
to:
• Lock/unlock the driver's door if the remote
key is not functioning properly
• Lock/unlock the glove compartment (see
page 63)
• Enable/disable the valet locking function
(see page 59)
• The trunk can be opened manually if necessary (see page 64)
56
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
wise approximately one-quarter turn to unlock
the driver's door only.
Removing the key blade
02
NOTE
After unlocking the driver's door with the
key blade, opening the door will trigger the
alarm.
G021082
To disable the alarm:
Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.
Pull the key blade straight out of the remote
key.
Reinserting the key blade in the remote
key
Insert the remote key in the ignition slot. This
also applies to vehicles equipped with the
optional keyless drive.
Replacing batteries in the remote key/
PCC
The battery/batteries in the remote key/PCC
should be replaced if:
• The information symbol lights up and a text
appears in the information display.
1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the
key blade up.
and/or
2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.
• the vehicle's locks repeatedly do not react
3. Gently press the key blade in the groove
until it clicks into place.
when a button on the remote key/PCC is
pressed within approximately 60 ft (20 m)
from the vehicle.
Unlocking the doors with the detached
key blade
Insert the key blade as far as possible in the
driver's door lock. Turn the key blade clock-
Battery type CR 2430, 3 V (one battery in the
remote key, two batteries in the PCC)
``
57
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
Opening the remote key/PCC
02
PCC (two batteries)
Slide the spring loaded catch to the
side.
1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old batteries.
Pull the key blade straight out of the
remote key.
2. Insert the first new battery with the (+) side
upward.
Insert a small screwdriver in the hole
behind the spring loaded catch and carefully pry up the cover.
3. Insert the plastic spacer over the battery.
Insert the second new battery on top of the
plastic spacer, with the + side downward.
Re-assembling the remote key
NOTE
Turn the remote key with the buttons
upward so that the batteries do not fall out
when the cover is removed.
Replacing the batteries
CAUTION
When handling batteries, avoid touching
their contact surfaces as this could result in
poor battery function in the remote key.
Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–)
sides.
Remote key (one battery)
1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old battery.
2. Insert a new one with the (+) side downward.
58
1. Press the remote key's cover into place.
2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the
key blade up.
3. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.
4. Gently press the key blade in the groove
until it clicks into place.
Old batteries should be properly recycled.
02 Locks and alarm
Valet locking
Blocking access to the trunk
to block access to the trunk and glove compartment for e.g., valet parking or when the
vehicle is brought to the retailer for service.
With the valet locking function activated:
• The vehicle's doors can be locked or
02
Turn the key blade 180 degrees counterclockwise in the glove compartment lock to deactivate valet locking.
unlocked
G021083
Remove the key blade from the lock. A
message will appear in the instrument
panel display.
Deactivating the valet locking function
unlocked with the remote
• The engine can be started
• The glove compartment cannot be
Normal locking/unlocking function
Turn the key blade180 degrees clockwise.
• Access to the trunk is blocked (the trunk lid
cannot be unlocked or opened with the
remote, and the rear seat backrests cannot
be lowered
See page 63 for information on locking the
glove compartment normally, without activating the valet locking function.
Locking/unlocking points with valet locking activated
By utilizing the remote key with the key blade
removed, the valet locking feature enables you
G020508
G021084
Activating the valet locking function
Insert the key blade in the glove compartment lock.
59
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive
02
Keyless drive* (models with Personal
Car Communicator only)
Keyless locking and unlocking
Both of the PCCs provided with the vehicle
have the keyless function, and additional ones
can be ordered. The system can accommodate up to six PCCs.
Locking or unlocking the vehicle with the
key blade
The red rings in the illustration indicate the area
around the vehicle that is within range of the
keyless drive antennas.
Unlocking the vehicle
G020577
• A keyless drive remote key must be on the
Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft
(1.5 meters)
This system makes it possible to unlock and
lock the vehicle without having to press any
buttons on the Personal Car Communicators
(PCC). It is only necessary to have a keyless
drive remote key in your possession to operate
the central locking system.
same side of the vehicle as the door to be
opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters)
of the door's lock or the trunk (see the shaded areas in the illustration).
• Pull a door handle to unlock and open the
door or press the trunk opening control on
the trunk lid.
The number of doors that are unlocked at the
same time can be set in the vehicle's menu
system, under Car settings
Lock
Keyless entry. See page 122
settings
for a description of the menu system.
NOTE
NOTE
The buttons on the keyless drive remote key
can also be used to lock and unlock the
vehicle, see page 54 for more information.
60
If the PCC does not function normally (weak
battery, etc.), the vehicle can be unlocked
with the detachable key blade, see
page 57.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keyless drive keyhole cover
The driver's door on vehicles equipped with
keyless drive can be locked or unlocked with
the remote key's detachable key blade if necessary, see page 56 for information on removing the key blade from the remote key. To
access the keyhole in the driver's door:
1. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm)
straight up in the hole on the underside of
the keyhole cover.
> The cover will come off due to the pressure exerted when the key blade is
pushed upward.
2. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the
driver's door lock. Turn the key blade to
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive
unlock the driver's door only. This will trigger the alarm. Press the remote key into the
igniton slot to turn off the alarm.
3. Press the cover back into place after the
door has been unlocked.
Locking the vehicle
• When you leave the vehicle with a PCC in
When at least one PCC has been returned to
the car, the message will be erased in the display and the audible signal will stop when:
your possession and lock any door, the
position of the driver's seat and door mirrors will be stored in the seat's memory.
• A door has been opened and closed
• The PCC has been inserted in the ignition
Keyless drive remote key and driver's
seat/door mirror memory
• The next time a door is opened by a person
with the same PCC in his/her possession,
the driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically move to the position that they
were in when the door was most recently
locked.
slot
• The READ button (see page 124 for the
location of this button) has been pressed.
CAUTION
•
Keyless drive remote keys should never
be left in the vehicle. In the event of a
break-in, a remote found in the vehicle
could make it possible to start the
engine.
•
Electromagnetic fields or metal
obstructions can interfere with the keyless drive system. Avoid placing the
remote key near cellular phones, metallic objects or e.g., in a metal briefcase.
NOTE
If several people carrying PCCs approach
the vehicle at the same time, the driver's
seat and door mirrors will assume the positions they were in for the person who opens
the driver's door.
Models with keyless drive have a button on the
outside door handles
The doors and the trunk can be locked by
pressing the lock button in any of the outside
door handles.
NOTE
On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector
must be in the Park (P) position, all doors
and the trunk must be closed and the ignition must be switched off before the vehicle
can be locked.
02
See also page 81 for information on adjusting
and storing the seat's position in the seat memory.
USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952, KR55WK48964
Keyless drive information messages
NOTE
If all of the PCCs are removed from the vehicle
while the engine is running or if the ignition is
in mode II (see page 78) and all of the doors
are closed, a message will appear in the instrument panel display and an audible signal will
sound.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
``
61
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive
CAUTION
02
Location of the keyless drive antennas
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
Siemens VDO
5WK48891
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
For Automobile Use
G020479
Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952,
267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891
NOTE
This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The keyless drive system has a number of
antennas located at various points in the vehicle.
On the inside center of the rear bumper
Left rear door handle
Center of the parcel shelf, on the underside
Ceiling, above the center of the rear seat
Right rear door handle
Under the rear section of the center console
Under the front section of the center console.
62
WARNING
People with implanted pacemakers should
not allow the pacemaker to come closer
than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless
drive system's antennas. This is to help prevent interference between the pacemaker
and the keyless drive system.
02 Locks and alarm
Locks
From outside the vehicle
The remote key locks all of the doors and the
trunk.
The first press on the unlock button unlocks the
driver's door and a second press unlocks the
other doors and the trunk (see also page 54).
NOTE
The vehicle cannot be locked if a door is
open.
From inside the vehicle (central locking
button)
same time. Press
unlock.
to lock and
to
When leaving the vehicle, the doors can be
locked by pressing
with the driver's door
open and then closing the door. This will lock
all of the doors and the trunk.
can be turned on or off under Car settings
Lock settings
Doors automatic
lock. See page 122 for a description of the
menu system.
02
Glove compartment
Unlocking
The vehicle can be unlocked from inside the
vehicle in two ways:
• By pressing the unlock button ( ).
• The door can be unlocked by pulling the
door handle once and opened by pulling
the handle again.
Locking
• Press the lock button (
G020548
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
) after the front
doors have been closed.
• Each door can be locked individually with
the lock button on the respective doors.
The door must be closed first.
Automatic relocking
If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will
rearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the trunk
has been opened.
The glove compartment can only be locked
and unlocked using the detachable key blade
in the remote key. See page 56 for information
on removing the key blade from the remote
key.
Insert the key blade in the glove compartment lock.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
Central locking button
Automatic locking
The lock buttons on the door panel can be used
to lock or unlock all doors and the trunk at the
When the vehicle starts to move, the doors and
trunk can be locked automatically. This feature
Remove the key blade from the lock.
``
63
02 Locks and alarm
Locks
Locking/unlocking the trunk
02
The alarm indicator light on the dashboard will
go out to indicate that the alarm is not monitoring the entire vehicle. The accessory movement and inclination sensors will be automatically disconnected.
When the trunk is closed again (which has to
be done manually), it will have to be relocked
and the alarm rearmed by pressing the lock
button on the remote key.
NOTE
The taillights will illuminate automatically for
a short period when the trunk has been
opened.
Unlocking the trunk with the key blade
Unlocking/opening the trunk from the
passenger compartment
Trunk unlock button on the remote key
Unlocking the trunk with the remote key
Press the trunk unlock button on the
remote.
Press twice: This both unlocks the trunk and
pops it open slightly.
NOTE
Any excess weight (snow, etc.) on the trunk
lid may prevent it from opening.
64
G022853
Press once: This unlocks but does not open
the trunk. The trunk can then be opened by
pressing the rubber plate near the trunk lock. If
the trunk is not opened within two minutes it
will automatically relock and the alarm will be
rearmed.
Press the button on the lighting panel
to unlock and pop open the trunk
If the remote key is not functioning properly,
the trunk can be unlocked with the detachable
key blade. See page 56 for information on
removing the key blade from the remote key.
Pull out the cover over the trunk’s keyhole.
02 Locks and alarm
Locks
Unlock the trunk by inserting the key blade
in the keyhole and turning a half turn counterclockwise as shown in the illustration.
Opening the trunk from the inside (U.S.
models only)
WARNING
•
Keep vehicle doors and trunk locked
and keep keys out of a child’s reach.
Unsupervised children could lock themselves in an open trunk and risk injury.
Children should be taught not to play in
vehicles.
•
On hot days, the temperature in the
trunk or vehicle interior can rise very
quickly. Exposure of people to these
high temperatures for even a short
period of time can cause heat-related
injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk.
Locking the trunk with the remote key
Press the lock button on the remote, see
page 54
The alarm indicator on the dashboard will begin
flashing to show that the alarm has been
armed.
•
If the doors are locked while the trunk is
open, the trunk will remain unlocked
until the vehicle is relocked by pressing
the Lock button on the remote key.
On keyless drive vehicles, the gear
selector must be in the Park (P) position,
all doors and the trunk must be closed
and the ignition must be switched off
before the vehicle can be locked.
G022920
NOTE
•
02
Opening the trunk from the inside
The vehicle is equipped with a florescent handle on the inside of the trunk lid, which can be
used in an emergency situation to open the
trunk from the inside. Pull the handle down to
release the trunk lid. After use, the handle must
be pushed back into its original position before
the trunk can be closed.
This handle is not intended to be used to
anchor the trunk lid when long loads are being
transported.
65
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm
The alarm system
02
The alarm is automatically armed whenever the
vehicle is locked with the remote key or
optional Personal Car Communicator.
Do not attempt to repair any of the components in the alarm system yourself. This
could affect the insurance policy on the
vehicle.
Press the Lock button on the remote key.
One long flash of the turn signals will confirm that the alarm is armed.
The hood is forced open.
The trunk is forced open
USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)
The alarm indicator light
A door is forced open.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The ignition slot is tampered with.
An attempt is made to start the vehicle with
a non-approved key (a key not coded to
the car's ignition).
• If there is movement in the passenger compartment (if the vehicle is equipped with
the accessory movement sensor).
Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)
• The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehicle
is equipped with the accessory inclination
sensor).
• The battery is disconnected (while the
alarm is armed).
• The siren is disconnected when the alarm
is disarmed.
A message will appear in the information display if a fault should occur in the alarm system.
Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
66
Arming the alarm
Alarm confirmation settings can be changed
Lock settings
under Car settings
Keyless entry. See page 122 for a description of the menu system.
When armed, the alarm continuously monitors
a number of points on the vehicle. The following conditions will trigger the alarm:
•
•
•
•
•
NOTE
The status of the alarm system is indicated by
the red indicator light on the dashboard (see
illustration):
• Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed
• The indicator light flashes at one-second
intervals – the alarm is armed
• The indicator light flashes rapidly before
the remote key is inserted in the ignition
slot and the ignition is put in mode I—the
alarm has been triggered.
Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation
is subject to the following conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm
Disarming the alarm
Remote key not functioning
If the remote key is not functioning properly,
the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can
be started as follows:
Press the Unlock button on the remote key.
> Two short flashes from the car's direction indicators confirm that the alarm
has been deactivated and that all doors
are unlocked.
Turning off (stopping) the alarm
If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by
pressing the Unlock button on the remote key
or by inserting the remote key in the ignition
slot. Two short flashes from the car's direction
indicators confirm that the alarm has been
turned off.
Other alarm-related functions
Automatic re-arming
If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will
re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the
trunk has been opened.
Audible/visual alarm signal
• An audible alarm signal is given by a battery powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts
for 30 seconds.
• The visual alarm signal is given by flashing
all turn signals for approximately 5 minutes
or until the alarm is turned off.
1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.
> This will trigger the alarm.
2. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot.
This will turn off the alarm.
Reduced alarm function
Turning off the accessory alarm sensors
In certain situations it may be desirable to turn
off the accessory inclination and movement
alarm sensors if, for example, you drive your
vehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of the
boat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left in
the vehicle with the doors locked.
The vehicle's menu system is used for turning
off these sensors (see page 122 for a description of the menu system).
1. Go into the menu under Car settings.
2. Select Reduced guard See manual
(Press Enter to choose).
manual will appear in the instrument
panel display and the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors will
be deactivated when the vehicle is
locked.
02
• Ask on exit. If this alternative is
selected, the message Press ENTER
to reduce guard until engine is
started. Press EXIT to cancel. will
appear in the center console display
each time the engine is turned off and
the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors will be deactivated
when the vehicle is locked.
4. Press ENTER and lock the vehicle.
The next time the engine is started, the alarm
system will be reset and Full guard will appear
in the instrument panel display. The accessory
inclination and movement alarm sensors will be
reactivated.
In either of the alternatives, if you prefer not to
deactivate the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors, do not make a choice in
the menu or press EXIT and lock the vehicle.
3. Two alternatives are now available:
• Activate once. If this alternative is
selected, Reduced guard See
67
Instruments and controls........................................................................ 70
Ignition modes........................................................................................ 78
Seats....................................................................................................... 80
SeatsಥS80 Executive ............................................................................. 86
Steering wheel........................................................................................ 88
Lighting................................................................................................... 89
Wipers and washers................................................................................ 95
Power windows....................................................................................... 98
Mirrors................................................................................................... 100
Compass*.............................................................................................. 102
Power moonroof*.................................................................................. 103
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*................................................. 105
Starting the engine................................................................................ 108
Transmission......................................................................................... 112
Brakes................................................................................................... 115
Parking brake........................................................................................ 117
68
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
03
70
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Function
Page
Function
Page
Function
Page
Menus and messages, turn signals,
high/low beams,
trip computer
122, 92,
89, 154
98, 100,
48, 63
Power seat* adjustment controls
80
159
Horn, airbag
88, 22
122, 135,
128
Main instrument
panel
71
Menu controls,
audio and climate
control systems
Lighting panel, buttons for opening
fuel filler door and
unlocking and
opening the trunk
89, 210,
64
Cruise control
In-door control panels (power windows, mirrors,
power child safety
locks, central locking button)
122
Audio system/Bluetooth hands-free
controls
134, 148
Center console buttons
Gear selector
112
Ignition slot
78
Controls for active
chassis (Four-C)
158
START/STOP
ENGINE button
78
Hazard warning
flashers
91
Door handle
–
03
Information displays
Controls for active
chassis (Four-C) certain models only
Wipers and washers
95, 96
Steering wheel
adjustment
88
Parking brake
117
Hood opening control
255
Information displays in the instrument panel
The information displays (1) show information
on some of the vehicle's functions, such as
cruise control, the trip computer and messages. The information is shown with text and
symbols.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
71
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
in the red area of the gauge. The engine
management system will automatically
prevent excessively high engines speeds.
This will be noticeable as a pronounced
unevenness in engine speed.
More detailed information can be found in the
descriptions of the functions that use the information displays.
Gauges
03
Indicator, information, and warning
symbols
should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the function
check is carried out in ignition mode II, all symbols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol
for faults in the vehicle's emissions system and
the symbol for low oil pressure.
Certain symbols may not have their functions
illustrated, depending on the vehicle's equipment.
Indicator and information symbols
Symbol
Description
Fault in the Active Bending
Light (ABL)*system
Gauges in the instrument panel
Malfunction indicator light
Speedometer
Fuel gauge. Please note that the fuel level
indicator in the gauge moves from right to
left as the amount of fuel in the tank
decreases. The arrow indicates the side of
the vehicle that the fuel filler door is on. See
also the section on refueling beginning on
page 208. See page 154 for more information on fuel level and consumption.
The tachometer shows engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Do not drive continuously with the needle
72
Indicator and warning symbols
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Indicator and information symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
High beam and turn signal indicators
Function check
All indicator and warning symbols light up in
ignition mode II or when the engine is started.
When the engine has started, all the symbols
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Rear fog light on
Stability system
Tire pressure monitoring sensor (TPMS)
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Symbol
Description
checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.
Low fuel level
A malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) light
may have many causes. Sometimes, you may
not notice a change in your car's behavior.
Even so, an uncorrected condition could hurt
fuel economy, emission controls, and drivability. Extended driving without correcting the
cause could even damage other components
in your vehicle.
Information symbol, see text
in information display
High beam indicator
Left turn signal indicator
Right turn signal indicator
Fault in the Active Bending Light
(ABL) system
This symbol will illuminate if the there is a fault
in the ABL system. See page 90 for more
information about this system.
Malfunction Indicator Light
As you drive, a computer called On-Board
Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's
engine, transmission, electrical and emission
systems.
The malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE)
light will illuminate if the computer senses a
condition that potentially may need correcting.
When this happens, please have your vehicle
This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is
not closed tightly or if the engine was running
while the vehicle was refueled.
Canadian models are equipped with this
symbol.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
warning light
If the warning light comes on, there may be a
malfunction in the ABS system (the standard
braking system will still function). Check the
system by:
1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off
the ignition.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the warning light goes off, no further
action is required.
If the warning light remains on, the vehicle
should be driven to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for inspection, see
page 115 for additional information.
Canadian models are equipped with this
symbol.
03
Rear fog light
This symbol indicates that the rear fog light
(located in the driver's side tail light cluster) is
on.
Stability system
This indicator symbol flashes when the DSTC
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control system) is actively working to stabilize the vehicle,
see page 156 for more detailed information.
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)*
This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire
pressure in one or more tires is low, see
page 246 for detailed information.
Low fuel level
When this light comes on, the vehicle should
be refueled as soon as possible. See page
208 for information about fuel and refueling.
Information symbol
The information symbol lights up and a text
message is displayed to provide the driver with
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
73
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
necessary information about one of the vehicle's systems. The message can be erased and
the symbol can be turned off by pressing the
READ button (see page 124 for information) or
this will take place automatically after a short
time (the length of time varies, depending on
the function affected).
The information symbol may also illuminate
together with other symbols.
High beam indicator
This symbol illuminates when the high beam
headlights are on, or if the high beam flash
function is used.
Left turn signal indicator
Indicator and warning symbols
Symbol
Description
Low oil pressure
Parking brake applied
SRS airbags
Canadian models are equipped with this
symbol.
Generator not charging
See page 117 for more information about
using the parking brake.
Fault in the brake system
Warning symbol
NOTE
•
74
Both turn signal indicators will flash
when the hazard warning flashers are
used.
If either of these indicators flash faster
than normal, the direction indicators are
not functioning properly.
A flashing symbol means that a fault has been
detected. See the message in the information
display.
Seat belt reminder
Right turn signal indicator
•
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates when the parking
brake is applied. On models equipped with the
electric parking brake, this symbol flashes
while the brake is being applied and then glows
steadily.
Low oil pressure
If the light comes on while driving, stop the
vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is normal and the light stays on after restart, have the
vehicle towed to the nearest trained and qualified Volvo service technician. This is normal,
provided it goes off when the engine speed is
increased.
Airbags – SRS
If this light comes on while the vehicle is being
driven, or remains on for longer than approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has been
started, the SRS system's diagnostic functions
have detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag,
and/or an inflatable curtain. Have the system(s)
inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician as soon as possible.
See page 21 for more information about the
airbag system.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Seat belt reminder
This symbol comes on for approximately 6 seconds if the driver has not fastened his or her
seat belt.
Generator not charging
This symbol comes on during driving if a fault
has occurred in the electrical system. Contact
an authorized Volvo workshop.
Engine temperature
Engine overheating can result from low oil or
coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high
heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction.
Engine overheating will be signaled with text
and a red warning triangle in the middle of the
instrument display. The exact text will depend
on the degree of overheating. It may range from
High engine temp Reduce speed to High
engine temp Stop engine. If appropriate,
other messages, such as Coolant level low,
Stop safely will also be displayed. If your
engine does overheat so that you must stop the
engine, always allow the engine to cool before
attempting to check oil and coolant levels.
See page 258 for more information.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may
be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and
check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 258. If the level in the reservoir is below
MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an
authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake
system checked.
WARNING
•
Canadian models are equipped with this
symbol.
If the
and
symbols come on at the
same time, there may be a fault in the brake
force distribution system.
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off
the engine.
•
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark
in the reservoir or if a warning message
is displayed in the text window: DO
NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to
a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician and have the brake system
inspected.
03
If the ABS and Brake system lights are
on at the same time, there is a risk of
reduced vehicle stability.
2. Restart the engine.
• If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.
• If the symbols remain on, check the level in
the brake fluid reservoir, see page 258. If
the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven,
with great care, to an authorized Volvo
workshop to have the brake system
checked.
• If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, the
vehicle should be transported to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake
system checked.
Warning symbol
The red warning symbol lights up to indicate a
problem related to safety and/or drivability. A
message will also appear in the main instruments panel's display. The symbol remains
visible until the fault has been rectified but the
text message can be cleared with the READ
button, see page 124. The warning symbol can
also come on in conjunction with other symbols.
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the vehicle further.
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear
the message using READ.
``
75
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Reminder – doors not closed
03
If one of the doors, the hood or trunk lid is not
closed properly, the information or warning
symbol comes on together with an explanatory
text message in the instrument panel. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the door, hood or trunk.
If the vehicle is driven at a speed
lower than approximately 5 mph
(7 km/h), the information symbol comes on.
If the vehicle is driven at a speed
higher than approximately 5 mph
(7 km/h), the warning symbol comes on.
Odometer display
Button for toggling between T1 and T2,
and for resetting the odometer
The trip odometers are used to measure short
distances. A short press the button toggles
between the two trip odometers T1 and T2. A
long press (more than 2 seconds) resets an
active trip odometer to zero. The distance is
shown in the display.
Turn the control clockwise/counterclockwise
to set the time. The set time is shown in the
information display.
The clock may be temporarily replaced by a
symbol in conjunction with a message, see
page 124.
Analogue clock (S80 Executive only)
Clock
G029076
Trip odometers
Analogue clock
Button for setting the clock back.
Clock and setting control
Display
Control for setting the clock
Trip odometers and reset button
76
Burton for setting the clock ahead.
The analogue clock is located on the dashboard, above the glove compartment.
Use either of the buttons to move the clock's
hands back or ahead. This can be done in two
ways:
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
To set the clock 1:
1. Hold down the button.
> The hand will move slowly for the first
5 minute time change and then move
faster.
2. Release the button when the time shown
on the clock is correct.
03
To set the clock 2:
Press the button quickly.
> The hand will move at approximately
10-second intervals.
77
03 Your driving environment
Ignition modes
Inserting and removing the remote key
Ignition modes
Ignition mode 0
The various ignition modes are accessed with
the remote key in the ignition slot.
Position
WARNING
Function
The ignition key should always be fully
inserted in the ignition slot when the vehicle
is being towed to help prevent the steering
wheel from locking.
03
0
I
Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP
ENGINE button.
Inserting the remote key
II
Holding the end of the remote key with the
base of the key blade, insert the remote key
into the ignition slot as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
Foreign objects in the ignition slot can
impair function or damage the lock.
Removing the remote key
78
The headlights come on. Warning/indicator lights come on for
5 seconds. All equipment operates apart from heated seats and
rear window defroster, which
only work when the engine is running.
On vehicles with the optional keyless drive,
the remote key must be in the passenger
compartment and the driver's door must be
closed.
Ignition mode I
Press the remote key into the ignition slot
and press START/STOP ENGINE briefly.
Ignition mode II
Press the remote key into the ignition slot
and press START/STOP ENGINE for
approximately 2 seconds.
Ignition mode III (engine start)
III
The remote key can be removed from the ignition slot by pressing the key in lightly. It will
then be ejected slightly and can be removed
from the slot. The gear selector must be in
position P (Park).
Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated. Steering lock is deactivated. The audio
system can be used.
Moonroof*, power windows,12volt sockets, navigation system*,
climate system blower, ECC,
windshield wipers can be used.
Insert the remote key in the ignition slot and
press it lightly. It will be drawn into the slot.
The starter motor will operate
until the engine has started.
Start the engine, see page 108.
Stopping the engine
NOTE
The brake pedal must not be depressed
when accessing ignition modes I or II.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press START/STOP ENGINE. (If the
engine is running and the vehicle is moving, keep the button depressed until the
engine stops).
03 Your driving environment
Ignition modes
Returning to ignition mode 0
Press START/STOP ENGINE briefly to
return to ignition mode 0 from modes I or
II.
Emergency towing
If the vehicle is being towed, the steering wheel
must be unlocked and the remote key must be
in the ignition slot1.
03
Ignition mode II should be used so that the
lighting can be switched on.
1
On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, the remote key must be in the passenger compartment.
79
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Front seats
•
03
•
WARNING
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest.
Do not adjust the seat while driving. The
seat should be adjusted so that the
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow.
Without releasing the catches, push the
backrest forward.
Check that the seat is securely locked
into position after adjusting.
Folding the front seat backrest
Lumbar support: turn the control for firmer
or softer lumbar support.
Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and
move the seat to the position of your
choice.
Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the
angle of the backrest.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Control panel for power seat*.
The front passenger seat backrest can be
folded to a horizontal position to make room for
a long load. Fold the backrest as follows:
Move the seat as far back and down as
possible.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
80
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Move the seat as far forward as possible
so that the head restraint slides under the
glove compartment.
WARNING
•
When transporting long objects, cover
sharp edges on the load to help prevent
injury to occupants. Secure the load to
help prevent shifting during sudden
stops.
•
When the seat's backrest is returned to
the upright position, push and pull it to
be sure that it is securely locked in this
position.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Power seat*
Three different seating and door mirror positions can be stored in the driver seat's memory.
•
Only one of the power seat's controls
can be used at the same time.
•
The power seats have an overload protector that activates if a seat is blocked
by any object. If this occurs, switch off
the ignition (key in position 0) and wait
for a short period before operating the
seat again.
Seat with memory function
The following example explains how button (1)
can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) are
programmed in the same way.
03
To program (store) a seat position and door
mirror position in button (1):
1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the
desired position using the seat and mirror
adjustment controls.
2. Press and hold down the memory button
(4).
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat forward/rearward and up/down
3. With the memory button depressed, press
button (1) briefly to store the current position for the seat/mirrors.
Backrest tilt
Operation
The seats can be adjusted for a short period
after unlocking the door with the remote control without the key in the ignition slot. Seat
adjustment is normally made when the ignition
is on and can always be made when the engine
is running.
Programming the memory
NOTE
To move the seat and mirrors to the position
that they were in when a button was programmed:
Stored seat position
Stored seat position
Stored seat position
Press and hold down button (1) until the
seat and mirrors stop moving.
NOTE
As a safety precaution, the seat will stop
automatically if the button is released before
the seat has reached the preset position.
Memory button
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
81
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Remote keyless entry system and the
driver's seat and door mirrors1
1. Unlock the driver's door with the same
remote control (the one used to lock the
doors).
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the buttons to stop the seat.
2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.
The driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically move to the position in which you left
them.
03
NOTE
The remote control transmitter also controls
the position of the power driver's seat and door
mirrors in the following way:
•
The key memory is independent of the
seat memory.
•
The seat will move to this position even
if someone else has moved it to a different seating position and locked the
vehicle with a different remote control.
•
This feature will work in the same way
with all of the remote control transmitters that you use with your vehicle.
1. Adjust the seat to your preferences.
2. When you leave your vehicle, lock it using
the remote control.
The position of the driver's seat and door mirrors is now stored in the remote control's memory.
Automatic seat/mirror adjustment
The function can be activated/deactivated
Seat & mirror
under Car key memory
positions. For a description of the menu system, see the information beginning on page
122.
To move the seat and door mirrors to the position in which you left them:
1
82
See page 61 for information regarding vehicles with the optional keyless drive.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
•
Because the driver's seat can be
adjusted with the ignition off, children
should never be left unattended in the
vehicle.
•
Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
at any time by pressing any button on
the power seat control panel.
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving. The
seat should be adjusted so that the
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow.
•
The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is
in motion.
Heated/ventilated seats*
See page 129.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Rear seats
Rear center head restraint
The center head restraint should be adjusted
according to the passenger's height. The
restraint should be carefully adjusted to support the occupant's head.
Automatically folding down the rear
seat’s outboard head restraints
• Pull the head restraint up as required.
• To lower, press the button at the base of
03
the head restraint’s left support while
pressing the head restrain down.
WARNING
The center rear seat head restraint should
only be in its lowest position when this seat
is NOT occupied. When the center position
is occupied, the head restraint should be
correctly adjusted to the passenger’s
height. The upper edge of the head restraint
should be at least on a level with the uppermost point of the seat occupant's ear.
1. The ignition must be in mode I or II.
2. Press the button to lower the rear head
restraints for improved visibility.
NOTE
•
The head restraint must be returned to
the upright position manually.
•
The outboard head restraints cannot be
folded down on models that are not
equipped with this button.
``
83
03 Your driving environment
Seats
CAUTION
The rear head restraints should not be kept
folded down for prolonged periods. This
could result in pressure marks in leather
upholstery.
03
WARNING
For safety reasons, no one should be
allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat positions if the head restraints are folded down.
If these positions are occupied, the head
restraints should be in the upright (fixed)
position.
Folding down the rear seat backrests
The rear seat backrests are split and can be folded
down together or separately
84
1. Pull the release control handle(s).
2. Fold the backrest forward. Adjust the center seat head restraint if necessary.
WARNING
•
Keep vehicle doors and trunk locked
and keep keys out of a child’s reach.
Unsupervised children could lock themselves in an open trunk and risk injury.
Children should be taught not to play in
vehicles.
•
On hot days, the temperature in the
trunk or vehicle interior can rise very
quickly. Exposure of people to these
high temperatures for even a short
period of time can cause heat-related
injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk.
NOTE
When the backrests are folded down, move
the outboard head restraints forward
slightly so that they do not catch on the seat
cushion.
CAUTION
To help avoid damage to the upholstery,
there should be no objects on the rear seat
and the seat belt should not be buckled
when the backrest is folded down.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
WARNING
•
When one or more sections of the backrest is returned to the upright position,
check that it is properly locked in place
by pushing and pulling it. The red indicators should also not be visible.
•
Return the outboard head restraints to
the upright position.
•
Long loads should always be securely
anchored to help avoid injury in the
event of a sudden stop.
•
Always turn the engine off and apply the
parking brake when loading/unloading
the vehicle.
•
Place the transmission in the Park (P)
position to help prevent inadvertent
movement of the gear selector.
•
On hot days, the temperature in the
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people to these high temperatures for even a short period of time
can cause heat-related injury or death.
Small children are particularly at risk.
03
85
03 Your driving environment
Seatsಥ
ಥS80 Executive
Front seats
Massage
Lumbar support
Button for moving the passenger's seat
forward/rearward
Button for massage and lumbar support
Button for activating the massage function
Firm massage
Gentle massage
Each front seat has a massage function in its
backrest. The massage action is done with air
cushions, which can be adjusted to a firm or
gentle setting. When the setting has been
made, the massaging action is carried out in
cycles as follows: massage 6 minutes – pause
4 minutes – massage 6 minutes, etc.
When the button is in the center position or if
the ignition is in mode 0, the massage function
is switched off.
86
G030227
G030131
G030132
03
Button for adjusting lumbar support
The lumbar support uses the same air cushions
as the massage function. The button can be
used to adjust the amount of support in four
directions, as shown in the illustration.
Lumbar support can be only be adjusted when
the massage function is switched off.
A memory function stores the lumbar support
setting and this support will resume after the
massage function has been switched off or
after the vehicle has been parked for an
extended period of time.
03 Your driving environment
Seatsಥ
ಥS80 Executive
Moving the passenger's seat
G030137
03
The front passenger's seat can be moved forward/rearward from the driver's seat or the rear
seat.
Press the front section of the button to move
the seat forward or the rear section of the button to move the seat rearward. This button
does not affect the backrest tilt.
87
03 Your driving environment
Steering wheel
Adjusting
WARNING
Horn
Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.
With the optional speed-dependent power
steering the level of steering force can be
adjusted, see page 158.
03
G021138
Keypads
Adjusting the steering wheel
Horn
Lever for releasing/locking the steering
wheel
Possible positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and reach:
1. Pull the lever toward you to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
Keypads in the steering wheel
3. Push back the lever to lock the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to
push into place, press the steering wheel
lightly at the same time as you push the
lever.
88
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cruise control, see page 159. Adaptive
cruise control*, see page 161.
Audio controls, see page 134.
Press the steering wheel hub to sound the
horn.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Lighting panel
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumb wheel.
High beam flash
Move the lever toward the steering wheel to
position 1. The high beams come on until the
lever is released.
High/low beam headlights
High/low beam headlights
Continuous high beams
03
G022854
1. Set the ignition to mode II.
1
2
G022855
Overview, light switches
Thumb wheel1 for adjusting display and
instrument lighting
Rear fog light
Front fog lights
Headlights/parking lights
Instrument lighting
Illumination of the display and instrument lights
will vary, depending on ignition mode.
The display lighting is automatically subdued
in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the
thumb wheel.
1
Headlight switch and lever
High beam flash
Toggle between high and low beams
Daytime running lights/no high
beams
Parking lights
Low beams
2. With the light switch in position
, pull
the turn signal lever toward the steering
wheel to position 2 to toggle between high
and low beams (this also applies on models equipped with the optional Active
Bending Lights).
> The symbol
illuminates in the
instrument panel to indicate that the
high beams are on.
Low beams
When the engine is started, the low beams are
activated automatically (daytime running lights)
if the headlight control is in position 0 or
.
Daytime running lights can be deactivated by
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
On the S80 Executive, the thumb wheel also adjusts the lighting level in the door handles, storage compartments in the doors, the analogue clock, the cup holders between the front seats and the
front footwell lighting.
``
89
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
•
The use of daytime running lights is
mandatory in Canada.
•
Continuous high beams cannot be activated when the headlight switch is in
position
or 0. High beam flash will
function in these positions.
Active Bending Lights (ABL)*
in the menu system under Car settings
Light settings Active bending lights.
NOTE
This function is only active in twilight or dark
conditions, and only when the vehicle is in
motion.
If a fault should occur in the system, the symbol
will illuminate and a message will be displayed
as shown in the table.
Symbol
Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light
function deactivated (left) and activated (right)
When this function is activated, the headlight
beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve
according to movements of the steering wheel
(see the right-pointing beam in the illustration).
ABL is activated automatically when the engine
is started and it can be deactivated/reactivated
90
Parking lights
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Display
Explanation
Headlamp
failure
Service
required
The system
is not functioning
properly and
should be
inspected/
repaired by
a trained
and qualified
Volvo service technician.
G022907
NOTE
Headlight control in position for parking lights
The front and rear parking lights can be turned
on even when the ignition is switched off.
Turn the headlight control to the center position (the license plate lighting comes on at the
same time).
The lighting also comes on when the trunk is
opened in order to alert anyone traveling
behind your vehicle.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Rear fog light
Front fog lights*
NOTE
The rear fog light is considerably brighter
than the normal taillights and should be
used only when conditions such as fog, rain,
snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for
other vehicles to less than 500 ft.
(150 meters).
03
G014403
G014402
Hazard warning flashers
Button for front fog lights
Button for rear fog light
The front fog lights can be switched on
together with high/low beams or the parking
lights. However, the fog lights switch off and
remain off while the high beams are on.
The single rear fog light is located in the driver's
side taillight cluster. The rear fog light will only
function in combination with the high/low
beam headlights or the optional front fog lights.
Press the button to switch the fog lights on/
off. The light in the button comes on when
the fog lights are on.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the use of the front
fog lights may vary, depending on where
you drive.
Press the button to switch the rear fog light
on/off.
> The rear fog light indicator symbol
on the instrument panel and the
light in the button come on when the
rear fog light is switched on.
Location of the hazard warning flasher button
The hazard warning flasher should be used to
indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic
hazard.
To activate the flashers, press the button
in the center dash. Press the button again
to turn off the flashers.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
91
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
•
Regulations regarding the use of the
hazard warning flasher may vary,
depending on where you live.
•
The hazard warning flashers will be activated automatically if an airbag
deploys.
Turn signals
When turning
Interior lighting, front
Move the lever as far up or down as possible to start the turn signals. The turn signals will
be cancelled automatically by the movement of
the steering wheel, or the lever can be returned
to its initial position by hand.
NOTE
•
This automatic flashing sequence can
be interrupted by immediately moving
the lever in the opposite direction.
•
If the turn signal indicator flashes faster
than normal, check for a burned-out
turn signal bulb.
G021149
NOTE
Light switches, front roof lighting
Drivers side front reading light, on/off
Passenger's side front reading light, on/off
Overhead courtesy lighting.
The lighting in the front part of the passenger
compartment is controlled with the buttons (1)
and (2) in the roof console.
Turn signals
When changing lanes
The driver can automatically flash the turn
signals 3 times by moving the turn signal lever
up or down to the first position and releasing it.
Switch (3) has three positions for all passenger
compartment lighting:
• Off: right side depressed, automatic lighting off.
• Neutral position: automatic lighting is on.
• On – left side depressed, passenger compartment lighting on.
92
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Interior lighting, rear
Overhead courtesy lighting
Home safe lighting
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and off automatically when button
(3) is in the neutral position.
When you leave your vehicle at night, you can
make use of the home safe lighting function to
illuminate the area in front of the vehicle.
The lighting comes on and remains on for
30 seconds if:
1. Remove the key from the ignition slot.
• the vehicle is unlocked from the outside
with the key or remote control
• the engine is switched off and the ignition
G021150
is in mode 0.
Rear reading lights
The lights are switched on or off by pressing
each respective button.
Courtesy lights/door step lighting*
The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch
on/off automatically when one of the front
doors is opened/closed.
Glove compartment lighting
The glove compartment lighting switches on/
off automatically when the lid is opened/
closed.
The lighting switches off when:
• the engine is started
• the vehicle is locked from the outside.
The lighting comes on and remains on for two
minutes if one of the doors is open.
The passenger compartment lighting can be
switched on and off manually within 30 minutes
after the vehicle has been unlocked.
If the lighting is switched on manually and the
vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will
switch off automatically after one minute.
Trunk lighting
The trunk lighting comes on automatically
when the trunk lid is opened.
2
2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible
towards the steering wheel and release it.
03
3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.
The headlights, parking lights, turn signals,
lights in the door mirrors, license plate lights,
and footwell lighting will illuminate and remain
on for 30 2, 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval
can be set under Car settings
Light
settings
Home safe light duration. For
a description of the menu system, see
page 122.
Approach lighting
Approach lighting is activated by pressing the
approach light button on the remote key (see
the illustration on page 54).
When the function has been activated, the
parking lights, indicator lights, door mirror
lights, license plate lighting, dome lighting and
door step lighting come on.
Factory setting
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
93
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
The time interval for this lighting can be set
Light settings
under Car settings
Approach light duration. For a description
of the menu system, see page 122.
03
94
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washers
Windshield wipers/washers
Windshield wipers off
Move the lever to position 0 to switch
off the windshield wipers.
Single sweep
Move the lever upward from position
0 to sweep the windshield one stroke
at a time for as long as the lever is held up.
Intermittent wiping
Windshield wipers and washers
Rain sensor* on/off
With the lever in this position, you can
set the wiper interval by twisting the
thumb wheel upward to increase wiper speed
or downward to decrease the speed.
Continuous wiping
The wipers operate at normal speed.
Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency
CAUTION
•
•
Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield. The windshield should
be thoroughly wet when the wipers are
in operation.
Before using the wipers, ice and snow
should be removed from the windshield/rear window. Be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen in place.
The wipers operate at high speed.
Windshield wiper service position
The windshield wipers must be in the service
position before the wiper blades can be
cleaned or replaced. See page 267 for additional information.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper
speed according to the amount of water on the
windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor
can be adjusted moving the thumb wheel up
(the wipers will sweep the windshield more frequently) or down (the wipers will sweep the
windshield less frequently).
NOTE
The wipers will make an extra sweep each
time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward.
03
When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol
will illuminate in the instrument panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity
When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle
must be running or in ignition mode II and the
windshield wiper lever must be in position 0 or
in the single sweep position.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button
. The windshield wipers will make one
sweep.
Press the lever up for the wipers to make an
extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active
mode when the stalk is released back to position 0.
Deactivating
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the butor press the lever down to another
ton
wiper position.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
95
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washers
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the key is removed from the ignition slot
or five minutes after the ignition has been
switched off.
CAUTION
03
The rain sensor should be deactivated when
washing the car in an automatic car wash,
etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the
wipers will start inadvertently in the car
wash and could be damaged.
Heated washer nozzles*
High-pressure headlight washing*
High-pressure headlight washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlights are washed using two alternatives:
• Low/high beam headlights on. The headlights will be washed the first time the windshield is washed. Thereafter, the headlights will only be washed once for every
five times the windshield is washed within
a 10-minute period.
Windshield washing
• Parking lights on. Optional Active Bending Lights will be washed once for every
five times the windshield is washed. Normal halogen headlights will not be washed.
CAUTION
Use ample washer fluid when washing the
windshield. The windshield should be thoroughly wet when the wipers are in operation.
Washing function
Move the lever toward the steering wheel to
start the windshield and headlight washers.
After the lever is released the wipers make several extra sweeps.
96
IR-reflecting windshield*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically
in cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Section of the windshield where the IR-coating is
not applied
Dimensions
A
1.9 in. (47 mm)
B
3.4 in. (87 mm)
An optional factory-installed infrared (IR) coating can be applied to the windshield to help
protect the cabin from the sun's heat and the
fading effect of sunlight on upholstery, panels,
etc.
Electronic equipment such as garage door
openers, electronic toll tags and similar devices should not be placed on sections of the
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washers
windshield with the IR coating because this
could affect their function and limit their range.
For best performance, place the device on the
section of the windshield without the IR coating
(see the area marked in the illustration).
03
97
03 Your driving environment
Power windows
Power windows
Operating
NOTE
03
•
Movement of the windows will stop if
they are obstructed in any way.
•
To reduce buffeting wind noise if the
rear windows are opened, also open the
front windows slightly.
Manual up/down
G018516
G018517
Driver's door control panel
Operating the power windows
Manual up/down
Switch for power child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons,
see page 48
Rear window controls
Front window controls.
WARNING
98
•
Always remove the ignition key when
the vehicle is unattended.
•
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
•
Make sure that the windows are completely unobstructed before they are
operated.
Auto up/down.
Move one of the controls up/down slightly.
> The power windows move up/down as
long as the control is held in position.
Auto up/down
Move one of the controls up/down as far
as possible and release it.
> The window will open or close completely.
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel in the driver's door. The control
panels in the other doors only operate the window in the respective doors.
Resetting
For the power windows to function, the ignition
must be in at least mode I. When the vehicle
has been running, the power windows can be
operated for several minutes after the remote
key has been removed from the ignition slot, or
until a door has been opened.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button
to close the window and hold it for one
second.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
If the battery has been disconnected, the auto
open function must be reset so that it will work
properly.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
03 Your driving environment
Power windows
Laminated glass*
Side rear windows
This glass is reinforced to help provide protection against break-ins and
improved sound insulation in the
passenger compartment.
The windshield, optional monroof and other
windows have laminated glass.
03
Sun shades*
Rear window
Hook and lock tab
The sun shade is integrated into the panels on
both rear doors.
1. Pull up the sun shade and hook it into the
upper edge of the door frame.
2. Lock the sun shade in place by pulling lock
tab upward.
Integrated rear sun shade
The window can be opened and closed, even
if the sun shade is in use.
Pull up the sun shade and attach its hooks
to the ceiling clips.
> The sun shade's spring-loading will pull
it taut.
When not in use, release the hooks and hold
the sun shade while it retracts.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
99
03 Your driving environment
Mirrors
Power door mirrors
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces:
1. Press down the L and R buttons at the
same time.
2. Release them after approximately one second. The mirrors automatically stop in the
fully retracted position.
G018518
03
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended position.
Door mirror controls
Storing the position*
Adjusting
1. Press the L button for the left door mirror
or the R button for the right door mirror.
The light in the button comes on.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
center.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be on.
WARNING
Objects seen in the mirrors may appear further away than they actually are.
100
The mirror positions are stored in the key memory when the vehicle has been locked with the
remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with
the same remote control the mirrors and the
driver's seat adopt the stored positions when
the driver's door is opened.
The function can be activated/deactivated
Seat & mirror
under Car key memory
positions. For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
Tilting the door mirrors when parking*
The door mirrors can be tilted down to help
give the driver a better view along the sides of
the vehicle, for example when parallel parking.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
To activate this function, select reverse gear
and press the L or R mirror control button to tilt
the mirror down.
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings Door mirror settings
Auto tilt left mirror or Auto tilt right
mirror. For a description of the menu system,
see page 122.
The door mirror will reset to its normal position:
• after 10 seconds when reverse is disengaged and the car remains stopped.
• immediately when reverse is disengaged
and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
• immediately if you press the corresponding L or R button again.
• when the engine is turned off.
• when the side mirrors are folded in.
NOTE
Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time.
Automatically tilting the door mirrors
when parking
The door mirrors can tilt down automatically to
help give the driver a better view along the
sides of the vehicle, for example when parallel
parking. When the transmission is no longer in
03 Your driving environment
Mirrors
reverse, the mirrors will automatically return to
their original position.
Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
This function can be activated/deactivated in
Car settings Door mirror settings Auto
tilt left mirror or Auto tilt right mirror.
Interior rearview mirror
Auto-dim function
An integrated sensor reacts to headlights from
following traffic and automatically reduces
glare in the mirror.
Automatic retraction when locking
03
When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the
remote key the door mirrors are automatically
retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated
Fold mirr. when
under Car settings
locking. For a description of the menu system,
see page 122.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be electrically reset
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending to work.
• Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
• Fold them out again with the L and R buttons.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Home safe and approach lighting
The light on the door mirrors comes on when
approach lighting or home safe lighting is
selected, see page 93.
Use the defroster to quickly remove fog and ice
from the rear window and the door mirrors.
Press the button once to start simultaneous
rear window and door mirror defrosting. The
light in the button indicates that the function is
active. Switch the function off when then windows have cleared to help avoid battery drain.
The rear window is defogged/de-iced automatically if the vehicle is started in an outside
temperature lower than 45 °F (7 °C). Autodefrosting can be selected under Climate
Auto rear defroster. Select
settings
between On or Off.
101
03 Your driving environment
Compass*
Operation
netic zone. The character C is shown in the
mirror's display if calibration is necessary.
1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely
out of traffic and away from steel structures
and high-tension electrical wires.
Selecting a magnetic zone
1
2
15
14
3
2. Start the vehicle.
03
13
4
Rearview mirror with compass.
The rearview mirror has an integrated display
that shows the compass direction in which the
vehicle is pointing. Eight different directions are
shown with the abbreviations: N (north), NE
(north east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south),
SW (southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest).
The compass is displayed automatically when
the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To
switch the compass on/off use a pen or similar
object and press in the button on the rear side
of the mirror.
3. Using a pen or similar object, press and
hold the button on the rear side of mirror
until C is shown again in the mirror(after
approx. 6 seconds).
4. Drive as usual. C disappears from the display when calibration is complete.
Calibration
The compass may need to be calibrated if, for
example, the vehicle is driven into a new mag-
102
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Alternative calibration method:
Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 5 mph (8 km/h) until C disappears from the display when calibration is
complete.
12
8
5
9
6
7
11
10
G018632
G029737
NOTE
For best results from calibration, switch off
all electrical equipment in the vehicle (climate system, windshield wipers, audio system, etc.) and make sure that all doors are
closed.
Magnetic zones.
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The correct zone must be selected for the compass to work correctly.
1. Put the ignition in mode II.
2. Using a pen or similar object, press and
hold the button on the rear side of mirror
for at least 3 seconds. The number for the
current area will be shown.
3. Press the button repeatedly until the number for the required geographic area
(1 – 15) is shown.
4. The display will revert to showing the compass direction after several seconds.
03 Your driving environment
Power moonroof*
Introduction
Sliding moonroof
Manual closing
The moonroof controls are located in the ceiling console near the rearview mirror. The
moonroof can be opened vertically and horizontally. The vehicle's must be in ignition mode
I or II for the moonroof to be operated.
Push the switch forward to the first stop
(the position for manual closing) and hold
it until the moonroof has closed to the position of your choice, or has closed completely.
Automatic closing
•
Remove ice and snow before opening
the moonroof.
•
Do not operate the moonroof if it is frozen closed.
•
Never place heavy objects on the
moonroof.
WARNING
Sliding moonroof, forward/rearward
•
During manual closing, if the moonroof
is obstructed, immediately open it
again.
Closing, manual
•
Never open or close the moonroof if it is
obstructed in any way.
Closing, automatic
•
Never allow a child to operate the
moonroof.
•
•
Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.
Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Automatic opening
Pull the switch as far back as possible (to
the position for automatic opening) and
release it to automatically fully slide open
the moonroof.
Manual opening
03
Push the switch as far forward as possible
(the position for automatic closing) and
release it to automatically close the moonroof.
G021343
CAUTION
Never extend any object or body part
though the open moonroof, even if the
vehicle's ignition is completely
switched off.
Pull the switch back to the first stop (the
position for manual opening) and hold it
until the moonroof has opened to the position of your choice.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
103
03 Your driving environment
Power moonroof*
Wind blocker
Tilt position
G028899
03
Tilt position, raised at the rear edge
Open by pressing the rear edge of the control upward.
The moonroof is equipped with a wind blocker
that folds up when the moonroof is open.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the control downward and hold it until the moonroof has closed completely.
Visor
The moonroof features a sliding visor. The visor
slides open automatically when the moonroof
is opened, and must be closed manually.
104
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*
Introduction
•
•
•
The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters
used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks,
security systems, even home lighting. Additional HomeLink information can be found on
the Internet at www.homelink.com.
1
Programming HomeLink
WARNING
If you use HomeLink to open a garage
door or gate, be sure no one is near the
gate or door while it is in motion.
When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park outside of
the garage.
Do not use HomeLink with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and
reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes
any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage
door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal
safety standards. For more information,
contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com.
Retain the original transmitter of the RF device
you are programming for use in other vehicles
as well as for future HomeLink programming. It
is also suggested that upon the sale of the
vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be
erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing
HomeLink Buttons”.
NOTE
Some vehicles may require the ignition
switch to be turned on or to the second
(“accessories”) position for programming
and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device
being programmed to HomeLink for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
03
1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator
light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release both the
HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons.
HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
105
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*
found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
NOTE
03
Some devices may require you to replace
this Programming Step 2 with procedures
noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Programming” section. If the HomeLink indicator light does not change to a rapidly blinking light after performing these steps, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com.
3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the
door. If the door does not activate, press
and hold the just-trained HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the HomeLink button is pressed and
released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with “Programming” steps 4-6 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped
device (most commonly a garage door
opener).
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motorhead unit) in the garage, locate the “learn”
or “smart” button. This can usually be
106
5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button. (The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.) There
are 30 seconds to initiate step 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold
for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the
“press/hold/release” sequence a second
time, and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code
equipped device), repeat this sequence a
third time to complete the programming
process.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling
code equipped device.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not
be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage
door opener by using the “Programming” pro-
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink”
step 2 with the following:
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release every two seconds (“cycle”) your handheld transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light. Now you may release both
the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
buttons.
Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to complete.
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will
now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage
door opener, gate operator, security system,
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For
convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the
event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons (individual buttons cannot be
erased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined
below), follow the step noted:
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash-after 10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 20 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode
and can be programmed at any time beginning
with “Programming” - step 1.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink
Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a
HomeLink button previously trained, follow
these steps:
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink
at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any
interference that may be received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
03
NOTE
The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the
device.2
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with “Programming”
- step 1.
2
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
107
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
Start
03
1. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot
with the metallic key blade pointing outward (not inserted into the slot)1. Push
lightly on the remote key. It will be automatically drawn into the ignition slot in the
correct position.
2. Depress the brake pedal2.
3. Press and release the START/STOP
ENGINE button. The autostart function will
operate the starter motor until the engine
starts.
The starter motor operates for a maximum
of 10 seconds. If the engine has not
started, repeat the procedure.
Ignition switch with remote key inserted (see
page 78 for more information on ignition modes)
WARNING
1
2
108
NOTE
Before starting the engine:
Keyless drive*
•
•
Fasten the seat belt.
•
Make sure the brake pedal can be
depressed completely. Adjust the seat
if necessary.
To start a vehicle equipped with the keyless
drive feature, one of the remote keys must
be in the passenger compartment. Follow
the instructions in step 3 to start the vehicle.
Check that the seat, steering wheel and
mirrors are adjusted properly.
On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment.
If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause
the accelerator and/or brake pedal to catch.
Check that the movement of these pedals is
not impeded. Not more than one protective
floor covering may be used at one time.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
WARNING
3
4
•
Always remove the remote key from the
ignition slot when leaving the vehicle,
especially if there are children in the
vehicle.
•
Never remove the remote key from the
ignition slot while driving or when the
vehicle is being towed. The steering
lock could otherwise be activated, making it impossible to steer the vehicle. On
vehicles with the optional keyless drive,
never remove the remote key from the
vehicle while driving or during towing.
•
Always place the gear selector in Park
and apply the parking brake before
leaving the vehicle. Never leave the
vehicle unattended with the engine running.
•
Always open garage doors fully before
starting the engine inside a garage to
ensure adequate ventilation. The
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odorless but
very poisonous.
NOTE
•
•
After a cold start, idle speed may be
noticeably higher than normal for a
short period. This is done to help bring
components in the emission control
system to their normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which
enables them to control emissions and
help reduce the vehicle's impact on the
environment3.
Keylock: Your vehicle is equipped with
a keylock system. When the engine is
switched off, the gear selector must be
in the Park position before the key can
be removed4 from the ignition slot.
CAUTION
•
When starting in cold weather, the automatic transmission may shift up at
slightly higher engine speeds than normal until the automatic transmission
fluid reaches normal operating temperature.
•
Do not race a cold engine immediately
after starting. Oil flow may not reach
some lubrication points fast enough to
prevent engine damage.
•
The engine should be idling when you
move the gear selector. Never accelerate until after you feel the transmission
engage. Accelerating immediately after
selecting a gear will cause harsh
engagement and premature transmission wear.
•
Selecting P or N when idling at a standstill for prolonged periods of time will
help prevent overheating of the automatic transmission fluid.
03
If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.
``
109
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
03
Switching off the engine
To jump start your vehicle:
With the engine running, press the START/
STOP ENGINE button.
1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to
mode 0, see page 78).
If the gear selector is not in the P position or if
the vehicle is moving, press the button twice or
press and hold it in until the engine switches
off.
2. First connect the red jumper cable to the
auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1).
Jump starting
3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+)
terminal on your vehicle's battery (2),
marked with a "+" sign, located under a
folding cover.
4. Connect the black jumper cable to the auxiliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3) and
to the ground point in your vehicle's engine
compartment (right engine mount at the
top, on the outer screw) (4).
G021347
5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,
then start the engine in the vehicle with
dead battery.
Connecting the jumper cables
Follow these instructions to jump start your
vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another
vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the
12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another
vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touching to prevent premature completion of a circuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instructions provided for the other vehicle.
110
6. After the engine has started, first remove
the negative (–) terminal jumper cable
(black). Then remove the positive (+) terminal jumper cable (red).
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the state of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION
Connect the jumper cables carefully to
avoid short circuits with other components
in the engine compartment.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
WARNING
•
Do not connect the jumper cable to any
part of the fuel system or to any moving
parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.
•
Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which
is flammable and explosive.
•
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medical
help immediately if eyes are affected.
•
Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.
•
•
Do not smoke near the battery.
03
Failure to follow the instructions for
jump starting can lead to injury.
111
03 Your driving environment
Transmission
Automatic transmission
03
Shiftlock
Reverse (R)
When P has been selected, the transmission is
mechanically blocked in this position. The
brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in at least mode II (see page 78)
before the gear lever can be moved from the
P position.
The vehicle must be stationary when position
R is selected.
Always apply the parking brake when the vehicle is parked. Press the control to apply the
brake, see page 117.
G021351
Depress the button on the front of the gear
selector knob to move the gear selector
between the R, N, D, and P positions.
Geartronic allows you to manually shift among
your vehicle's six forward speeds. Geartronic
can be selected at any time.
G021350
Park position (P)
Select the P position when starting or parking.
1
112
Drive (D)
Geartronic–manual shifting
The gear selector can be moved freely between
the Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D)
positions while driving.
To remove the remote key from the ignition
slot, the gear selector must be in the P position.
The remote key is locked in the slot in all other
positions.
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started with the gear selector in this position.
Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is stationary with the gear selector in position N.
D is the normal driving position. The car automatically shifts between the various forward
gears, based on the level of acceleration and
speed. The car must be at a standstill when
shifting from position R to position D.
Shiftgate positions1
Keylock
Neutral position (N)
CAUTION
The vehicle must be stationary when position P is selected.
• To access the manual shifting position
from Drive (D), move the gear selector to
the right (to the area marked M in the illustration.
• To return to the D position from the manual
shifting position, move the gear selector to
the left.
The information display (see page 71) shows the gear selector's position or the selected gear by displaying the following: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.
03 Your driving environment
Transmission
While driving
Geartronic–starting on slippery surfaces
• If you select the manual shifting position
Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual shifting mode can help provide better traction when
starting off on slippery surfaces. To do so:
while driving, the gear that was being used
in the Drive position will also initially be
selected in the manual shifting position.
• Move the gear selector forward (toward
"+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward
(toward "–") to shift to a lower gear.
• If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the
transmission will downshift one gear at a
time and will utilize the braking power of
the engine. If the current speed is too high
for using a lower gear, the downshift will
not occur until the speed has decreased
enough to allow the lower gear to be used.
• If you slow to a very low speed, the transmission will automatically shift down.
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from N to
another gear position, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the ignition must be in position II, see page 78.
2
Shiftlock override
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the
gear selector to the right from the D position to the manual shifting position. The
text in the instrument panel display will
change from D to 1.
2. Press the gear selector forward and
release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press the
selector forward again and release it to
select 3rd gear.
3. Release the brake pedal and press gently
on the accelerator pedal.
03
If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example
because of a dead battery, the gear selector
must be moved from the P position before the
vehicle can be moved2.
Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of the
storage compartment behind the center
console to expose the small opening for
overriding the shiftlock system.
Insert the key blade into the opening. Press
the key blade down as far as possible and
keep it held down. Move the gear selector
from the P position. For information on the
key blade, see page 56.
If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 110.
``
113
03 Your driving environment
Transmission
Please be aware that overriding the shiftlock
system does not release the steering wheel
lock.
All Wheel Drive – AWD3
03
Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent
All Wheel Drive, which means that power is
distributed automatically between the front
and rear wheels. Under normal driving conditions, most of the engine's power is directed to
the front wheels. However, if there is any tendency for the front wheels to spin, an electronically controlled coupling distributes power to
the wheels that have the best traction.
3
114
Standard on certain models.
NOTE
The message AWD disabled Service
required will be appear in the information
display if an electrical fault should occur in
the AWD system. A warning light will also
illuminate in the instrument panel. If this
occurs, have the system checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
03 Your driving environment
Brakes
Brake system
Brake lights
The brake system is a hydraulic system consisting of two separate brake circuits. If a problem should occur in one of these circuits, it is
still possible to stop the vehicle with the other
brake circuit.
The brake lights come on automatically when
the brakes are applied.
If the brake pedal must be depressed farther
than normal and requires greater foot pressure,
the stopping distance will be longer.
A warning light in the instrument panel will light
up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred.
If this light comes on while driving or braking,
stop immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir.
NOTE
Press the brake pedal hard and maintain
pressure on the pedal – do not pump the
brakes.
WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the
reservoir or if a brake system message is
shown in the information display: DO NOT
DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician and
have the brake system inspected.
Adaptive brake lights
The adaptive brake lights activate in the event
of sudden braking or if the ABS system is activated. This function causes an additional taillight on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to
help alert vehicles traveling behind.
The adaptive brake lights activate if:
• The ABS system activates for more than
approximately a half second
• In the event of sudden braking while the
vehicle is moving at speeds above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
When the vehicle has come to a stop, the brake
lights and additional taillights remain on for as
long as the brake pedal is depressed or until
braking force on the vehicle is reduced.
Power brakes function only when the
engine is running
The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure
which is only created when the engine is running. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the
engine switched off.
If the power brakes are not working, considerably higher pressure will be required on the
brake pedal to compensate for the lack of
power assistance. This can happen for exam-
ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine is
switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The
brake pedal feels harder than usual.
Water on brake discs and brake pads
affects braking
Driving in rain and slush or passing through an
automatic car wash can cause water to collect
on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a
delay in braking effect when the pedal is
depressed. To avoid such a delay when the
brakes are needed, depress the pedal occasionally when driving through rain, slush, etc.
This will remove the water from the brakes.
Check that brake application feels normal. This
should also be done after washing or starting
in very damp or cold weather.
03
Severe strain on the brake system
The brakes will be subject to severe strain
when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or
when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually
slower, which means that the cooling of the
brakes is less efficient than when driving on
level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes,
shift into a lower gear and let the engine help
with the braking. Do not forget that if you are
towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to
a greater than normal load.
``
115
03 Your driving environment
Brakes
Anti-lock braking system
03
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to
improve vehicle control (stopping and steering)
during severe braking conditions by limiting
brake lockup. When the system "senses"
impending lockup, braking pressure is automatically modulated in order to help prevent
lockup that could lead to a skid.
The system performs a brief self-diagnostic
test when the engine has been started and
driver releases the brake pedal. Another automatic test may be performed when the vehicle
first reaches a speed of approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several
times and a sound may be audible from the
ABS control module. This is normal.
ing. The system is activated by the speed with
which the brake pedal is depressed.
When the EBA system is activated, the brake
pedal will go down and pressure in the brake
system immediately increases to the maximum
level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal
in order to utilize the system completely. EBA
is automatically deactivated when the brake
pedal is released.
NOTE
•
Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. This delay
is minimized by cleaning the brake linings.
Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet
weather, prior to long-term parking, and after
the vehicle has been washed. Do this by braking gently for a short period while the vehicle is
moving.
Emergency Brake Assistance
EBA is designed to provide full brake effect
immediately in the event of sudden, hard brak-
116
•
When the EBA system is activated, the
brake pedal will go down and pressure
in the brake system immediately increases to the maximum level. You must
maintain full pressure on the brake
pedal in order to utilize the system completely. There will be no braking effect if
the pedal is released. EBA is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal
is released.
When the vehicle has been parked for
some time, the brake pedal may sink
more than usual when the engine is
started. This is normal and the pedal will
return to its usual position when it is
released.
Symbols in the instrument panel
Symbol
Specification
Steady glow – Check the brake
fluid level. If the level is low, fill
with brake fluid and check for
the cause of the brake fluid
loss.
Steady glow for two seconds
when the engine is started –
There was a fault in the brake
system's ABS function when
the engine was last running.
WARNING
If
and
come on at the same time
and the brake level is below the MIN mark
in the reservoir or if a brake system-related
message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system
inspected.
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Electric parking brake
Applying the electric parking brake
An electric parking brake has the same function as a manual parking brake.
NOTE
•
In an emergency the parking brake can
be applied when the vehicle is moving
by holding in the control. Braking will be
interrupted when the accelerator pedal
is depressed or the control is released.
•
An audible signal will sound during this
procedure if the vehicle is moving at
speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
NOTE
•
•
A faint sound from the parking brake's
electric motor can be heard when the
parking brake is being applied. This
sound can also be heard during the
automatic function check of the parking
brake.
The brake pedal will move slightly when
the electric parking brake is applied or
released.
03
Parking on a hill
• If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front
Parking brake control
1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
Low battery voltage
2. Push the control.
If the battery voltage is too low, the parking
brake cannot be applied or released. Connect
an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too
low, see page 110.
3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that
the vehicle is at a standstill.
wheels so that they point away from the
curb.
• If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
front wheels so that they point toward the
curb.
The parking brake should also be applied.
4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selector must be in position P.
symbol in the instrument panel
The
flashes while the parking bake is being applied,
and glows steadily when the parking brake has
been fully applied.
``
117
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Releasing the electric parking brake
NOTE
•
•
03
For safety reasons, the parking brake is
only released automatically if the engine
is running and the driver is wearing a seat
belt.
Symbols
Symbol
Read the message in the information display
A flashing symbol indicates that
the parking brake is being
applied. If the symbol flashes in
any other situation then this
means that a fault has arisen.
Read the message on the information display.
The electric parking brake will be
released immediately when the accelerator pedal is pressed and the gear selector is in position D, R or .
2. Fasten the seat belt
1. Fasten the seat belt.
3. Move the gear selector to position D or R
and press the accelerator pedal. The parking brake will release when the vehicle
begins to move.
2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot.
Heavy load uphill
Manual release
3. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
4. Pull the parking brake control.
Vehicles with Keyless drive*
1. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button.
2. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
3. Pull the parking brake control.
Automatic release
1. Start the engine.
118
Messages
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
vehicle to roll backward when the parking
brake is released automatically on a steep
incline. To help avoid this:
1. Keep the electric parking brake lever
pushed in with the left hand while shifting
into Drive with the right.
2. While pressing the throttle pedal to pull
away, release the parking brake lever only
after the vehicle begins to move.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G016556
Parking brake control
Specification
Park brake not fully released – A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released.
Contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
drive off with this error message showing, a
warning signal sounds.
Parking brake not applied – A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied.
Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the message remains.
03
Parking brake Service required – A fault has
occurred. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault
remains.
WARNING
If the vehicle must be parked before the fault
has been corrected, always put the gear
selector in P and turn the wheels so that
they point away from the curb if the vehicle
is pointing uphill or toward the curb if it is
pointing downhill.
119
Menus and messages........................................................................... 122
Climate system..................................................................................... 126
Audio system........................................................................................ 134
Bluetooth® hands-free connection.......................................................
Trip computer........................................................................................
Stability system.....................................................................................
Active chassis system–Four C*.............................................................
Cruise control........................................................................................
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*............................................................
Distance Alert* .....................................................................................
Collision warning with Auto-brake*.......................................................
Driver Alert System* .............................................................................
Park assist*...........................................................................................
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* ..........................................................
Blind Spot Information System*............................................................
Passenger compartment convenience.................................................
Passenger compartment convenience–S80 Executive ........................
120
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
148
154
156
158
159
161
170
173
179
184
188
192
196
200
COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Center console
Steering wheel keypad
Certain functions are controlled from the center
console via the menu system or from the keypad in the steering wheel. Each function is
described under its respective section.
2. Scroll to the desired menu and press
ENTER.
3. Scroll to the desired submenu and press
ENTER.
The current menu level is shown at the top right
of display in the center console.
The navigation button can be used instead of
ENTER and EXIT when navigating the menu
hierarchy. The right arrow is equal to ENTER
and the left arrow to EXIT.
Center console controls
04
ENTER
EXIT
Navigation buttons.
Buttons (1-3) on the steering wheel keypad
have the same function as those in the center
console.
Center console with information display and controls for menus
Navigation button – scrolls and selects
among menu options
ENTER – selects menu options
MENU – accesses the menu system
EXIT – leads back one step in the menu
structure. A long press exits the menu system.
122
1. Press MENU.
Search paths
Access to some functions is provided directly
via the function buttons and others are
accessed through the menu system.
Search paths to the menu system functions are
Car settings
Lock
listed as follows:
settings, if the following steps have been taken
first:
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The menu options are numbered and can also
be selected directly with the numerical keypad
(1–9 only).
Menu overview
NOTE
Menu selections will not be available (will be
"grayed out") when the vehicle is moving.
Car key memory
Seat & mirror positions
Car settings
Collision warning settings*
Light settings
Lock settings
Reduced guard1
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Tire pressure
Main menu FM
Main menu USB
Door mirror settings
HD radio
USB settings
Parking camera settings (accessory)
FM settings
Audio settings
Lane departure warning*
Radio text
Steering force level*
Advanced radio settings
Information
Climate settings
Automatic blower adjust
Audio settings
iPod settings
Audio settings
Random
Track information*
Off
Auto. rear defroster
Folder
Reset climate settings
Main menu AM
HD radio
Last 10 missed calls
Last 10 received calls
Single disc
Last 10 dialled calls
All discs
Phone book
Track information*
04
Main Bluetooth menu
Disc
CD settings
Sound stage
1
2
Main iPod menu
Main menu CD
Recirculation timer
Audio settings2
Track information*
Search
Copy fr. mobile phone
Equalizer, front
Audio settings
Equalizer, rear
Main menu AUX
Connect phone
Auto. volume control
Volume, AUX input
Change phone
Resets all audio settings.
Audio settings
Remove phone
Bluetooth*
Certain models
The menu option for audio settings is available in all audio sources.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
123
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Phone settings
Call options
Sounds and volume
Synchronize phone book
The menus shown on the information displays
in the instrument panel are controlled with the
left lever. The menus shown depend on ignition
mode. Press READ to erase a message and
return to the menus.
When a warning, information or indicator symbol comes on, a corresponding message
appears on the information display. An error
message is stored in a memory list until the
fault is rectified.
Menu overview
Press READ to acknowledge and scroll among
the messages.
Driving distance on current fuel reserve
Main instrument panel
Average
NOTE
Instantaneous
04
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, the message must
be read and confirmed by pressing READ
before the previous activity can be
resumed.
Average speed
Current speed in mph (Canadian models
only)
G022908
DSTC
Messages
Message
Description
Stop safely
Stop and switch off
the engine. Serious
risk of damage.
Contact an authorized Volvo workshop.
Stopping the
engine
Stop and switch off
the engine. Serious
risk of damage.
Contact an authorized Volvo workshop.
Information display and menu controls
READ – access to the list of messages and
message confirmation.
RESET – reset the active function. Used in
certain cases to select/activate a function,
see the explanation under each respective
function.
124
G028940
Thumbwheel – browse among menus and
options in the list of functions.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Message
Description
Message
Description
Service urgent
Have the vehicle
checked by an
authorized Volvo
workshop immediately.
Maintenance overdue
Service required
Have the vehicle
checked by an
authorized Volvo
workshop as soon
as possible.
If the service intervals are not followed, the warranty
does not cover any
damaged parts.
Contact an authorized Volvo workshop
for service.
Temporarily OFF
A function has been
temporarily
switched off and is
reset automatically
while driving or after
starting again.
Power save mode
The audio system is
switched off to save
current. Charge the
battery.
See manual
Read the owner's
manual.
Book time for
maintenance
Time to book service
at an authorized
Volvo retailer.
Time for regular
maintenance
Time for regular
service at an authorized Volvo workshop. The timing is
determined by the
number of miles
driven, number of
months since the
last service, engine
running time.
04
125
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Introduction
Air conditioning
The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate
Control (ECC). The climate control system
cools, heats or dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment.
NOTE
The sunlight sensor monitors which side of
the car that is most exposed to sunlight.
This can mean that the temperature may
differ between the right and left-side air
vents, even if the temperatures set for both
sides of the passenger compartment are the
same.
NOTE
•
04
•
The air conditioning can be switched
off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compartment and to prevent the windows
from misting, it should always be on.
• The temperature sensor for the passenger
In warm weather, a small amount of
water may accumulate under the car
when it has been parked. This water is
condensation from the A/C system and
is normal.
• The humidity sensor* is located in the inte-
Sensor location
• The sunlight sensor is located on the top
side of the dashboard.
compartment is located below the climate
control panel.
• The outside (ambient) temperature sensor
is located on the door mirror.
Vents in the parcel shelf
NOTE
The air vents at the rear of the parcel shelf
should never be obstructed.
Temporary shut-off of the air
conditioning
The air conditioning is momentarily disengaged during full-throttle acceleration or when
driving uphill with a trailer. This may result in a
temporary increase in cabin temperature.
rior rearview mirror.
Ice and snow
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
Always keep the air intake grille at the base of
the windshield free of snow.
Climate system maintenance
To ensure that the air conditioning works optimally, the side windows, and the optional
moonroof should be closed.
Special tools and equipment are required to
maintain and carry out repairs on the climate
system. Work of this type should only be done
by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Fog on the inside of the windows
Refrigerant
Side windows and moonroof
The defroster function should be used to
remove fog or mist from the inside of the windows. Keeping the windows clean with a com-
126
mercially available window washing spray will
also help prevent fogging or misting.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volvo cares about the environment. The air
conditioning system in your car contains a
CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance
will not deplete the ozone layer. The air condi-
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Passenger compartment filter
Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at
the recommended intervals. Please refer to
your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, or consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for these intervals.
The filter should be replaced more often when
driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The
filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should
always be replaced with a new one.
NOTE
Air distribution
Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filter
replacement intervals.
Menu settings
The default settings for three of the climate
system's functions can be changed in the
menu system, see page 122:
• Blower speed in automatic mode, see
page 129.
G021366
tioning system contains 1.7 lbs (770 g) of
R134a. The systems uses PAG oil.
• Recirculation timer for passenger com-
04
partment air, see page 131.
NOTE
There are different types of cabin air filters.
Ensure that the correct type is installed.
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles
in the incoming air, thereby reducing the levels
of odors and contaminants entering the vehicle. The air quality sensor detects increased
levels of contaminants in the outside air. When
the air quality sensor detects contaminated
outside air, the air intake closes and the air
inside the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e. no outside air enters the vehicle. The
filter also cleans recirculated passenger compartment air.
• Automatic rear window defrosting, see
page 101.
The functions can also be returned to factory
settings in the menu system.
The incoming air is distributed from 20 different
vents in the passenger compartment.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode.
If desired, air distribution can be controlled
manually, see page 132.
``
127
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
G021367
04
Electronic climate control, ECC
Air vents in the door pillars
G021368
Air vents in the dashboard
Open
Open
Ventilated front driver's seat*
Closed
Closed
Blower
Horizontal airflow
Horizontal airflow
Heated front driver's seat*
Vertical airflow
Vertical airflow
Air distribution
Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost.
Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost.
Direct the vents into the passenger compartment to help maintain the desired temperature
in the rear seat.
Ventilated front passenger's seat*
Auto
Heated front passenger's seat*
Temperature control, passenger's side
A/C – On/Off
Heated rear window and door mirrors, see
page 101.
Defroster (maximum effect)
128
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Temperature control, driver's side
• Level one: press the button three times for
the lowest output – one indicator light
comes on.
• Press the button a fourth time to switch off
Climate system controls
Ventilated front seats*
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases
as the air in the passenger compartment
becomes cooler.
The ventilation is controlled by the ECC system, which takes into account the seat temperature, sunlight in the passenger compartment, and the ambient temperature.
The ventilation can be used at the same time
as seat heating.
The ventilation system can be activated when
the engine is running. There are three comfort
levels that produce different cooling and dehumidifying effects:
• Level three: press the button once for
maximum output – three indicator lights
come on.
• Level two: press the button twice for a
lower output – two indicator lights come
on.
the function – the indicator light will go out.
Heated front seats*
Press the button once for the
highest heat level – three indicator lights come on.
Press the button twice for a
lower heat level – two indicator lights come on.
By default, seat heating is off when the engine
is started. If the heating is on, it will automatically switch off when the engine is switched off.
Automatic start for seat heating can be set in
Seat heating off at
Climate settings
start
The seat heating switches off automatically
after several minutes. This function can be activated/deactivated in Climate settings Seat
heating timer
04
Heated rear seats*
Press the button three times for the lowest heat
level – one indicator light comes on.
Press the button four times to switch off the
heat – no indicator lights come on.
The seat heating is normally switched off when
the engine is started. If the heating is on when
the ignition is switched off, the heating will also
switch off. Automatic start of the seat heating
can be activated/deactivated in the menu system, under: Climate settings Seat heating
off at start
Seat heating is switched off automatically after
a certain length of time. This function can be
activated/deactivated in the menu system,
under: Climate settings Seat heating
timer
G021376
Recirculation/Air quality system
Heat control for the outboard seating positions
is done in the same way as for the front seats.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
129
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Blower control
Turn the control clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise
to decrease the blower
speed. Pressing the AUTO
switch will automatically regulate blower speed and override manual adjustment.
NOTE
04
If the blower is turned off completely, the air
conditioning is disengaged, which may
result in fogging on the windows.
Air distribution
The figure consists of three
buttons. When the buttons
are pressed, an indicator light
in front of the respective part
of the figure illuminates and
shows which manual air flow
has been selected. See also
the air distribution chart on page 132.
130
Auto
Temperature control
The function automatically
regulates cooling, heating,
blower speed, recirculation,
and air distribution to maintain the chosen temperature.
If you select one or more manual functions, the other functions continue to be controlled automatically.
The air quality sensor is engaged and all manual settings are switched off when AUTO is
pressed. The display shows AUTO
CLIMATE.
Blower speed in automatic mode can be set
Automatic fan
under Climate settings
adjust. Choose between Low, Normal or
High.
NOTE
Selecting the lowest blower speed may
increases the risk of fog forming on the windows.
The temperatures on the
driver and passenger sides
can be set independently.
When the vehicle is started,
the most recent setting is
resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up by
selecting a higher/lower temperature than
the actual temperature required.
A/C – ON/OFF
The air conditioning is controlled automatically by the
system when the ON light is
on. This cools/heats and
dehumidifies the incoming air.
When the OFF light is on, the
air conditioning is always disengaged. Other functions are still controlled
automatically. When defroster is selected, the
air conditioning system is set for maximum
blower speed and dehumidification.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Defroster
This function defrosts/de-ices
the windshield and front side
windows. The indicator light
in the defroster button lights
when the function is active.
• Blower speed increases automatically and
the air conditioning will switch on (if not
already on and if the passenger compartment blower is not turned off) to dehumidify the air in the passenger compartment.
Air conditioning can be switched off by
pressing the AC button.
• Recirculation will not function while defrost
is engaged.
The climate system will return to its previous
settings when the defroster function is
switched off.
Recirculation/air quality system
Interior Air Quality System–IAQS*
Recirculation
This system consists of a multifilter and an air quality sensor. The filter helps remove
gases and particles from the
incoming air, thereby reducing the amounts of odors and
contaminants entering the
vehicle. The air quality sensor detects
increased levels of contaminants in the outside
air. When the air quality sensor detects contaminated outside air, the air intake closes and
the air inside the passenger compartment is
recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated passenger compartment air. When the AUTO button
is depressed the air quality sensor is always
engaged.
This function can be used to
shut out exhaust fumes,
smoke, etc from the passenger compartment. The air in
the passenger compartment
is then recirculated, i.e., no air
from outside the car is taken
into the car when this function is activated. The
indicator light in the button will illuminate when
recirculation is selected.
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of condensation forming on the
insides of the windows, especially in winter.
Timer
The timer function minimizes the risk of fogging, or stale air when the recirculation function
is selected by automatically switching off the
function after a certain length of time, depending on the ambient temperature. Activate/
deactivate the function under Climate
Recirculation time. For a
settings
description of the menu system, see
page 122.
04
Activating the air quality sensor
Switch between the three
functions by pressing the button repeatedly.
NOTE
When Defroster is selected, recirculation is
always deactivated.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
131
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
• The left orange light comes on – the air
• The center green light comes on – recircu-
•
The air quality sensor should always be
engaged in order to obtain the best air
in the passenger compartment.
•
Recirculation is limited in cold weather
to avoid fogging.
lation not engaged, providing it is not
required for cooling in hot weather.
• The right orange light comes on – recircu-
•
NOTE
quality sensor is disengaged.
lation is engaged.
If the insides of the windows start fogging, disengage the air quality sensor.
Use the defroster function to increase
airflow to the front, side, and rear windows.
Air distribution table
04
132
Air distribution
Use
Air distribution
Use
Air to windows. Some air
flows from the dashboard
air vents. The air is not
recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.
To remove de-fog/deice the front side windows and windshield
quickly.
Air to the floor and windows.
Some air flows from the
dashboard air vents.
To ensure comfortable
conditions and good defogging in cold or humid
weather.
Air to windshield and side
windows. Some air flows
from the air dashboard
vents.
In cold or humid
weather (blower
speed should be
moderate to high).
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents.
In sunny weather with
cool outside temperatures.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Air distribution
Use
Air distribution
Use
Airflow to windows and
from dashboard air vents.
To ensure good comfort in warm, dry
weather.
Air to floor. Some air flows to
the dashboard air vents and
windows.
To warm or cool the feet.
Airflow to the head and
chest from the dashboard
air vents.
To ensure efficient
cooling in warm
weather.
Airflow to windows, from
dashboard air vents and to
the floor.
To cool the feet or provide warmer air to the
upper body in cold
weather or hot, dry
weather.
04
133
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
Introduction
Overview
Steering wheel keypad
The audio system is available in three versions:
Performance, High Performance and Premium
Sound. The system version is shown in the display when the audio system is switched on.
04
If the audio system is on when the ignition is
switched off, it will come on automatically the
next time the ignition is put in mode I or higher.
The audio system can be operated without a
key in the ignition slot for 15 minutes at a time
by pressing the POWER button (the driver's
door must be closed on vehicles with the
optional keyless drive).
Some functions are controlled from the menu
system in the center console. For more information on menus, see page 122.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation. The Dolby Surround
Pro Logic II System is manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
1
134
iPod is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Socket for external audio source (AUX,
USB, iPodŸ1)*
Steering wheel keypad
Confirm selection in menu system and
controls for a bluetooth-connected cell
phone.
Center console control panel
Go higher in the menu system. Interrupt
current function.
Rear control panel with headphones
socket*
Volume
A short press scrolls between CD tracks or
preset radio stations. A long press
searches within CD tracks or searches for
radio stations automatically.
Please note that these functions are also available through the audio system controls on center console.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
Audio functions
of the vehicle. The level of sound compensation can be set at low, medium or high. Select
the level under Audio settings
Auto
volume control.
External audio source audio volume
Center console, controls for audio functions
Internal audio sources: AM, FM and CD
External audio source. For connection, see
page 134
Push button and knob controls for making
sound settings
Navigation button
Volume and on/off
Audio volume and automatic volume
control
The audio system compensates for disrupting
noises in the passenger compartment by
increasing the volume according to the speed
2
3
External devices such as an MP3 player can be
connected to the AUX input, see page 134. The
volume of the external sound source AUX may
be different from the volume of the internal
sound sources such as the CD player or the
radio. If the external sound source's volume is
too high, the quality of the sound may be
impaired. To help prevent this, adjust the input
volume of the external audio source:
1. Set the audio system in AUX mode using
MODE and use (4) to navigate to AUX
input volume.
2. Turn the control (3) or press
igation button.
/
the nav-
Sound settings
Press the control (3) repeatedly to toggle
among the sound settings. Adjustments are
made by turning the control (3).
• Bass – Bass level.
• Treble – Treble level.
• Fader – Balance between the front and
rear speakers.
• Balance – Balance between the right and
left speakers.
04
• Subwoofer* – Level for the bass speaker.
The subwoofer can be switched off by
turning control (3) counterclockwise to
Min.
• Surround* – Surround settings.
Under Surround, 3 channel stereo or Dolby
Surround Pro logic II can be activated by
selecting 3-ch or Dpl2 respectively. This enables the following options:
• Center level2 – Level for the center
NOTE
speaker.
Sound quality may be affected if the MP3
player is being charged while the system is
in AUX mode. To help prevent this, avoid
charging the MP3 player in a 12-volt socket
while it is being played.
• Surround level2 – Level for surround
sound.
Equalizer
Sound levels for different frequencies can be
adjusted separately using the equalizer3.
Premium Sound
High Performance and Premium Sound only
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
135
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
1. Go to Audio settings and select
Equalizer front or Equalizer rear.
The sound level for the frequency is
adjusted with / on the navigation button. Press
/
to select another frequency.
04
user to adapt sound reproduction to his/her
personal tastes.
Radio functions
Select waveband AM and FM (FM1 and
FM2)
Automatic tuning
1. Select a waveband using FM or AM.
2. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.
2. Press
Sound stage4
Manual tuning
The sound experience can be optimized for the
driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat.
Select one of the options under
Sound stage.
Audio settings
1. Select a waveband using FM or AM.
The audio system is calibrated for optimal
sound reproduction using digital signal processing.
/
on the navigation button.
2. Turn TUNING to select a station.
Preset stations
Optimal sound reproduction
Center console, controls for radio functions
Navigation button for automatic tuning
Ten station presets can be stored for each
waveband. FM has two memories for presets:
FM1 and FM2. The stored presets are selected
using the preset buttons.
Preset storage can be carried out manually or
automatically.
This calibration takes into account factors such
as the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, the
listeners' seating positions, etc., for each combination of vehicle/audio system.
Press to cancel a menu selection or a
selected function
Manual tuning
1. Tune into a station.
There is also a dynamic calibration that takes
into consideration the volume level, radio
reception, and the speed of the vehicle.
Scan the current waveband
2. Hold in one of the preset buttons until the
message Channel stored appears on the
display.
The settings that are described in this manual,
such as Bass, Treble, and Equalizer front/
Equalizer rear are only intended to enable the
4
136
Station preset buttons
Certain markets only.
Auto store the strongest radio stations in
the area in which you are driving
Manually storing preset stations
Automatically storing preset stations
The function is especially useful in areas where
the radio stations and their frequencies are
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
unfamiliar. The ten strongest radio stations are
stored automatically in a separate memory.
1. Select a waveband using FM or AM.
2. Hold in AUTO until Autostoring appears
on the display.
Once Autostoring disappears from the display, the stations are stored. The radio continues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the
display. The automatically stored presets can
now be selected using the preset buttons.
Automatic preset storage can be cancelled
using EXIT.
Auto mode is cancelled by pressing for example AUTO or FM.
Returning to Auto mode provides access to the
autostored presets:
1. Press AUTO.
> Auto appears on the display.
2. Press a preset button.
Scan
The function automatically searches the current waveband for strong stations. When a station is found, it is played for approx. eight seconds before scanning is resumed. While the
5
station is playing it can be stored as a preset
as usual.
USB5/iPodŸ connector*
NOTE
Storing a station interrupts the SCAN function.
1. Select a waveband using AM or FM.
2. Press SCAN.
> SCAN appears on the display. Close
using SCAN or EXIT.
Radio text
Some stations transmit information on program content, artists, etc. This information can
be shown on the display.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Radio
text.
04
AUX and USB sockets in the storage compartment
between the front seats
An auxiliary device, such as an iPodŸ, MP3
player or a USB flash drive can be connected
to the audio system via the connectors in the
center console storage compartment. A standard cable from an iPodŸ or MP3 player can be
routed under the cover to the AUX connector
in the storage compartment.
A sound source must be chosen, depending on
the device that has been connected:
1. Use MODE to select iPod or USB. The text
Connect device will be displayed.
High Performance and Premium Sound only
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
137
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
2. Connect the device to the connector in the
center console storage compartment (see
the illustration).
The text Loading will be displayed while the
system loads the files (folder structure) on the
device. This may take a short time.
When information about the files (the folder
structure) on the device has been loaded, the
resulting list includes information on the artist,
genre and song title.
04
To navigate in the folder structure, press
ENTER and scroll up and down the folders
using the arrow buttons (on the audio system
control panel or on the steering wheel keypad).
Press the right arrow button to select a folder.
Press the left arrow button to go up a level in
the folder structure. Press ENTER to go down
a level in the folder structure.
NOTE
The system supports playback of files in the
most common versions of formats such as
mp3, wma, and wav. However, there may be
versions of these formats that the system
does not support.
Many MP3 players have a file indexing system
that is not supported by the vehicle's audio
system. In order to use an MP3 player, the system must be set to USB Removable device/
Mass Storage Device.
The system also supports a number of
iPodŸ models produced in 2005 or later.
iPodŸ
USB flash drive
To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is
advisable to only store music files on the drive.
It will take considerably longer for the system
to index the files on the drive if it contains anything other than compatible music files.
NOTE
•
Tracks can be selected in two ways:
• Turn the manual tuning knob clockwise or
counterclockwise
• Use the right or left arrow keys on the navigation control to select the desired track.
The arrow keys on the steering wheel keypad can also be used in the same way.
138
MP3 player
•
The system supports removable media
that uses the USB 2.0 standard and the
FAT32 file system and can index up to
500 folders and a maximum of 64,000
files. The device must have at least 256
Mb of memory.
When using a longer type of USB flash
drive, connecting it with a USB adapter
cable will help reduce mechanical wear
on the USB socket and the USB flash
drive.
An iPodŸ receives current and its battery is
charged through the connecting cord. However, if the iPod's battery is completely
drained, it should be recharged before the
iPodŸ is connected to the audio system.
NOTE
When an iPodŸ is used as a sound source,
the vehicle's audio system has a menu
structure similar to the one in the iPodŸ. See
the iPod's manual for detailed information.
For further information, refer to the accessory
manual USB/iPodŸ Music Interface.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
Rear control panel with headphones
socket*
Headphones with an impedance of
16 – 32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher
are recommended for best sound reproduction.
Activating/deactivating
The control panel is activated by pressing
MODE when the audio system is switched on.
It is switched off automatically when the audio
system is switched off or by a long press on
MODE.
HD Radio൅reception (U.S. models
only)
Introduction
Scroll/search forward and backward
Short presses on (2) are used to scroll between
CD tracks or preset radio stations. Long
presses are used to fast-wind CD tracks or to
search for radio stations automatically.
04
Limitations
The audio source (FM, AM, CD, etc.) being
played in the speakers cannot be controlled
from the rear control panel.
Volume control (right/left sides)
Scroll/search forward and back
MODE – select AM, FM, HD Radio൅6, CD,
AUX, USB/iPodŸ* and ON/OFF.
Headphones sockets (3.5 mm)
6
7
Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio
broadcast
NOTE
HD radio volume may fade in and out at
times due to coverage limitations.
HD radio is a brand name registered by the
Ibiquity digital corporation7. They are the
developer of a broadcasting technology called
IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to
the method of transmitting a digital radio
Available on U.S. models only
HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
139
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
broadcast signal centered on the same frequency as the AM or FM station's present frequency.
04
The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"
since it is both analogue and digital. During
hybrid operation, receivers still continue to
receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD
radio receivers incorporate both modes of
reception, where the receiver will automatically
switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal
cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver.
When you have tuned to an HD Radio station,
symbol will appear in the audio systhe
tem display.
More information about HD radio and IBOC
can be found on Ibiquity's website,
www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com.
Benefits of digital broadcasting
• Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality
and AM as analogue FM).
• Some FM frequencies offer a greater number of listening choices through “multicasting” (consisting of a frequency's main
channel and any sub-channels that may
also be available on that particular frequency. See also the section "Sub-channels" below).
• When receiving a digital signal there is no
multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/
crackling due to outside influences.
140
that as with any radio broadcast technology, terrain, time of day, foliage level and
building location can have positive or negative effects on radio reception.
How HD broadcasting works
HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio
and broadcasts of this type are available in
many areas of the United States. However,
there are a few key differences:
• Analogue to digital/digital to analogue
blending: Analogue to digital blending will
occur as the signal strength reaches a preset threshold in the receiver. This will be
noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak
reception) and is normal.
• Instead of transmitting one analogue signal, stations send out a bundled signal –
both analogue and digital.
• An HD radio receiver can receive both digital and analogue broadcasts. Depending
on the terrain and location of the vehicle
(which will influence the signal strength),
the receiver will determine which signal to
receive.
Limitations
• Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM
only): The main channel is the only channel
that can receive in hybrid mode (both digital and analogue). If a frequency has subchannels, they are broadcast in digital
mode only. The main FM channel will be
displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC
(Volvo uses the symbol > to indicate there
are sub-channels available) The sub-FM
channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2
WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc.
• Reception coverage area: Due to current
IBOC transmitter power limitations, the
reception coverage area in digital mode is
somewhat more limited than the station's
analogue coverage area. Please be aware
NOTE
There may be a noticeable difference in
sound quality when a change from analogue
to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such
as:
•
•
Volume increase or decrease
•
Time alignment (Digital program material in extreme cases can be as much as
8 seconds behind the analogue). This
will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect.
Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/
Treble cut or boost
The above items are dependant on the
broadcaster's equipment settings and do
not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio
receiver or antenna systems.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
Switching HD on or off
Sub-channels
The factory setting for HD radio is on. However,
when driving through areas with weak HD signals (fringe areas), you may experience that the
radio repeatedly switches between analogue/
digital and digital/analogue reception. If this
happens, it may be desirable to switch HD off.
To do so:
main channel, press the left arrow key. To go
to subchannel 2 (if available), press the right
arrow key.
If you are currently tuned to a frequency's main
channel, pressing the left arrow key will tune to
the next lower radio frequency.
NOTE
1. Be sure the audio system is switched on
and in AM or FM mode.
•
2. Press MENU in the center console control
panel.
3. Press ENTER to turn HD off (the X will disappear from the box on the display screen).
This will disable the radio's capability to receive
digital broadcasts but it will continue to function as a conventional (analogue) AM/FM
receiver. Please note that when HD is switched
off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-channels (see the following section for a more
detailed explanation of sub-channels).
Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to reactivate HD
(an X will appear in the box on the display
screen).
Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels
In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM
wavebands only) will also have sub-channels
offering additional types of programming or
music.
In such cases, the “>” symbol will be displayed
to the left of the frequency number and a number will be displayed to the right of the frequency number indicating that the currently
tuned frequency has at least one sub-channel.
The "2" in the illustration indicates that you are
currently listening to the first sub-channel on
frequency 93.9.
•
When the radio has gone into HD mode,
it may take several seconds before the
">" symbol (if the current frequency has
any sub-channels) is displayed to the
right of the frequency. Pressing the
arrow keys before the number is displayed will cause the radio to tune to the
next available radio station, not to the
current station's sub-channels.
04
When you are no longer in broadcasting
range of the currently tuned sub-channel, No HD reception will be displayed. The radio will then be muted
and it will be necessary to tune to or
search for a new radio station.
Selecting sub-channels
Sub-channels can also be stored as presets,
see page 136 for information on storing stations.
To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press
the right arrow key on the center console or on
the steering wheel keypad. To go back to the
If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it
may take up to 6 seconds before the channel
becomes audible. If you press this button while
``
141
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
you are out of digital range of the transmitter,
No HD reception will be displayed.
Sirius satellite radio*
Listening to satellite radio
The Sirius satellite system consists of a number
of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous
orbit.
NOTE
04
•
The digital signals from the Sirius satellites are line-of-sight, which means that
physical obstructions such as bridges,
tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere
with signal reception.
•
Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic objects transported on roof racks or
in a ski box, or other antennas that may
impede signals from the SIRIUS satellites.
Selecting Sirius radio mode
142
Activating Sirius radio
1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no
audio, which means that the channel is
unsubscribed and the text "Call 888-539SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE" is displayed (see
also "Selecting a channel".
2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474).
3. When asked for the Sirius ID number press
AUTO to display this number. It is also
possible to retrieve the Sirius ID from the
menu.
4. Updating subscription will be displayed
while the subscription is being updated,
after which the display will return to the
normal view.
SIRIUS ID
The SIRIUS ID is required when contacting the
Sirius Call Center. It is used to activate your
account and when making any account transactions. The SIRIUS ID is sometimes referred
to as the Electronic Serial Number (ESN).
1. Press Power to switch on the audio system (see page 135 and see page 136 for
information on the standard audio and
radio functions).
Selecting a channel category
2. Press the MODE button repeatedly until
Sirius 1 or 2 is displayed.
3. Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll
through the list of categories.
1. Select Sirius radio mode as described
above.
2. Press ENTER.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
4. Press ENTER or the right arrow key to
select a category.
> The first channel in the selected category will then be played.
NOTE
•
The category ALL is default, which enables you to scroll through the entire list
of available satellite channels.
•
The channel categories are automatically updated several times a year. This
takes approximately two minutes and
will interrupt normal broadcasting. A
message will be displayed while updating is in progress. Information on channel or feature updates is available at
www.sirius.com.
Selecting a channel
There are three ways of tuning in a channel:
• Using the left and right arrow keys
• By turning the tuning control
• Through direct channel entry.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
NOTE
•
page 136 for detailed information on storing
channels.
The numbers of skipped or locked
channels will not be displayed.
• A long press on one of the number keys
•
If a channel is locked, the access code
must be entered before the channel can
be selected. See "Unlocking a channel"
on page 144.
Direct channel entry
The Sirius satellite channels are in numerical
order throughout all of the categories. To
access a channel directly:
1. Press MENU and scroll to Direct channel
entry.
2. Use the numerical keypad to enter the
channel's number.
3. Press ENTER. The radio will tune to this
channel, even if it belongs to a category
other than the currently selected one.
Scanning
SCAN automatically searches through the list
of satellite channels. The search will only be
carried out in the selected category, see
page 136 for more detailed information.
Storing a channel
stores the currently tuned channel on that
key.
• A short press on a number key while the
radio is in Sirius 1or 2 mode will tune to the
preset satellite channel stored on that button, regardless of the currently selected
channel category.
Song Seek and Song Memory
The Song seek and Song memory functions
provide both audio and visual notification when
Sirius is broadcasting your favorite songs.
Song seek enables you to store the name of
the song for future advance notification when
that song is being played. The Song memory
feature makes it possible to view all of the current songs that are stored in memory.
If a new song is selected when the memory is
full, you will be prompted to press ENTER to
delete the last song on the list.
NOTE
The remaining songs in the list will move
down one position, and the newly added
song will be placed at the top of the list.
Song seek
When a satellite radio channel plays one of the
songs stored in the song memory, the listener
will be alerted by a text message and an audible signal.
04
Press ENTER to listen to the song or EXIT to
cancel.
To activate/deactivate the song seek function:
1. Press MENU
Song memory
2. Scroll to Song seek
Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's
memory.
3. Press ENTER to activate or deactivate the
function.
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Add song to song memory and
follow the instructions shown in the display.
NOTE
When the song has ended, the radio will
remain tuned to the channel on which the
song was played.
A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored;
10 channels each for Sirius 1 and 2, see
``
143
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
Radio text
Skip options
The text that is displayed about the song that
is currently playing can be changed. Use the
AUTO button or the menu to display the Artist,
Title, Composer, or switch radio text off.
This function is used to remove a channel from
the list of available channels.
Skipping a channel
1. Select Channel skip list and press
ENTER.
Advanced Sirius settings
This menu function enables you to make settings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions.
To access this menu:
04
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to the Sirius menu.
3. Select Advanced Sirius settings….
WARNING
Settings should be made when the vehicle
is at a standstill.
The following settings can be made in the Sirius menu:
•
•
•
•
The list of saved songs can be displayed
Channel skip settings can be made
Channel lock settings can be made
2. Select a category in the list and press
ENTER.
3. Skip channels in the list presented by
pressing ENTER or right arrow key.
Unskip all channels
This permanently removes all channels from
the skip list and makes them available for
selection.
Temp. unskip all ch.
This function will temporarily unskip all channels and make them available for selection. The
channels remain on the skip list and will again
be skipped the next time the ignition is
switched on.
Channel lock
Access to specific channels can be restricted
(locked). A locked channel will not provide
audio, song titles, or artist information.
The channel access code can be displayed
or changed
• Your Sirius ID can be displayed
8
144
The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."
NOTE
All channels are initially unlocked.
Locking a channel:
1. Select Sirius ID in the menu and select
Lock options and press ENTER.
2. Select Channel lock list and press
ENTER
3. Enter the channel access code8 and press
ENTER.
4. Select a category in the list and press
ENTER.
5. Lock channels in the list presented by
pressing ENTER or right arrow.
The channel is now locked and a checked box
will be displayed to indicate this. It will be necessary to enter the channel access code8 in
order to listen to a locked channel.
Unlocking a channel
A channel's access code8 is required to unlock
a channel.
Unlock all channels
This permanently removes all channels from
the locked list and makes them available for
selection.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
Temp. unlock all ch.
SIRIUS ID
Playing a CD (CD player9)
This function will temporarily unlock all channels and make them available for selection. The
channels remain on the locked list and will
again be locked the next time the ignition is
switched on.
This function displays the 12-digit Sirius activation ID.
If a music CD is in the player when CD is
pressed, it will be played automatically. Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD.
CD functions
Playing a CD (CD changer)
If a CD position with a music CD is already
selected when CD is pressed, it will be played
automatically. Otherwise select a disc with the
number buttons 1 – 6 or
/
on the navigation button.
CHANGE CODE
This function makes it possible to change the
channel access code. The default code is
0000.
To change the code:
1. Select Change code and press ENTER.
CD insert and eject
1. Select an empty position with the number
buttons 1 – 6 or
/
on the navigation
button.
> An empty position is marked on the display. The text Insert disc shows that a
new disc can be inserted. The CD
changer can hold up to six CDs.
CD slot
2. Insert a CD in the CD changer slot.
Navigation button for changing CD tracks
Disc eject
Fast-back and change CD track
For reasons of traffic safety, an ejected CD
must be removed within 12 seconds or it will
be automatically drawn back into the slot and
the CD player will enter pause mode. Press the
CD button to restart the disc.
2. Enter the current code and press ENTER.
3. Enter the new code and press ENTER.
4. Confirm the new code and press ENTER.
If an incorrect code is entered, the text
Incorrect code is displayed.
If you have forgotten the access code:
1. Select Sirius ID in the Sirius settings menu
and press ENTER.
2. Press and hold the ENTER button for
2 seconds.
3. The current code will be displayed.
Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with
assistance.
9
04
Insert a CD (CD changer)
Center console, controls for CD functions
CD changer* position selection
Scan CD
Certain markets only.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
145
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject button.
Eject all discs with a long press on the eject
button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by
disc.
NOTE
The Eject all function can only be used while
the vehicle is at a standstill and will be cancelled if the vehicle begins to move.
04
Pause
Navigating the disc and playing tracks
If a disc containing sound files is inside the CD
player, press ENTER to display the disc's
directory structure. The directory structure is
navigated in the same way as the audio system's menu structure. Sound files have the
symbol and directories have the
symbol. Press ENTER to play a selected folder
or a file.
Audio files10
When the music file has been played, the
player will continue to play the rest of the files
in the current folder. When all of the files in the
folder have been played, the player will automatically go to the next folder and play the files
in it.
In addition to playing normal music CDs, the
CD player/changer can also play discs containing files in mp3 or wma format.
Fast-forward/change CD tracks and
sound files
When the audio system volume is turned off
completely, the CD player will pause and will
resume playing when the volume is turned up
again.
NOTE
Some copy protected sound files may not
be read by the player.
When a CD containing sound files is inserted
into the player the disc's directory structure is
10 High
146
scanned before the CD begins playing. The
length of time that this takes depends on the
quality of the disc.
Performance and Premium Sound only
Scan CD
This function plays the first ten seconds of
each CD track/sound file. Press SCAN to activate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue
playing the current CD track/sound file.
Random
This function plays the tracks in random order
(shuffle). The random CD tracks/sound files
can be scrolled through in the normal way.
NOTE
It is only possible to scroll between random
CD tracks on the current disc.
Different messages are displayed depending
on which random function has been selected:
• Random means that the tracks from only
one music CD are played
Short presses
/
on the navigation button
are used to scroll between CD tracks/sound
files. Long presses are used to search within
CD tracks/sound files. TUNING (or the steering
wheel keypad) can also be used for this purpose.
• RND ALL means that all tracks on all
music CDs in the optional CD changer are
played.
• Folder means that the sound files in a
directory on the current CD are played.
CD player
If a normal music CD is being played, activate/
deactivate under Random.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
If a disc with sound files is being played, actiFolder.
vate/deactivate under Random
CD changer
If a normal music CD is being played under
Random Single disc
or Random
All discs. The All discs feature only applies
to the music CDs in the changer.
If a CD with sound files is being played, activate/deactivate instead under Random
Folder. If you select another CD the function is
deactivated.
04
Disc text
If title information is stored on a music CD it can
be shown on the display11. Activate/deactivate
in CD mode under CD settings
Disc
text.
11 Only
applies to the CD changer.
147
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Introduction
and other controls on the cell phone can
always be used regardless of whether or not
the phone is connected to the hands-free system.
Bluetooth® functions in the center
console control panel
NOTE
Not all cell phones are fully compatible with
the hands-free system. A list of compatible
phones is available at your Volvo retailer or
at www.volvocars.us
04
WARNING
System overview
Cell phone
Location of the microphone
Steering wheel keypad
Center console control panel and display
Bluetooth® hands-free
This feature makes it possible to set up a wireless connection between a BluetoothŸ-enabled cell phone and the vehicle’s audio system.
This enables the audio system to function as a
hands-free connection and allows you to
remote-control a number of the phone’s functions. The microphone used by this system is
located in the ceiling console (2). The buttons
148
Never use the hands-free feature or any
other device in your vehicle in a way that
distracts you from the task of driving safely.
Distraction can lead to a serious accident.
VOLUME – This function is also available
on the steering wheel keypad.
Keys containing letters and numbers for
dialing numbers, adding phone book
entries, etc.
PHONE – Press to activate/deactivate the
Bluetooth® function
Navigation buttons
EXIT – Press to end or defer calls, erase
characters that have been entered, end an
ongoing function. This function is also
available on the steering wheel keypad.
ENTER – Answer a call. Press once to display the most recently dialed number. This
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
function is also available on the steering
wheel keypad.
Getting started
Use the controls on steering wheel keypad (3)
and in the center console (4) to access, navigate and make selections in the hands-free
system’s menus (see page 148).
Activating/deactivating
A short press on the PHONE button in the center console activates the hands-free system.
The text PHONE will appear at the top of the
display to indicate that the audio system is in
telephone mode.
Alternative 1–using the vehicle's menus
Bluetooth®
1. Activate the cell phone’s
function (refer to the phone’s owner’s manual if
necessary) or go to www.volvocars.com
2. Activate the vehicle’s Bluetooth® handsfree system by briefly pressing the
PHONE button.
> Add phone will be displayed. If one or
more cell phones are already registered
in the system, they will also be displayed.
A long press on the PHONE button deactivates
the hands-free system and disconnects the
cell phone.
3. Select Add phone.
> The audio system will search for cell
phones that are in range. This search
takes approximately 30 seconds. Any
phones detected will be displayed with
their Bluetooth® names. The hands-free
system’s Bluetooth® name will appear
in the cell phone’s display as My Car.
Connecting cell phones
4. Select one of the cell phones shown in the
audio system’s (center console) display.
The procedure for connecting a cell phone varies, depending on the phone itself, and on
whether or not the phone has been previously
connected.
5. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the
digits shown in the audio system’s display.
If this is the first time the phone is to be connected to the hands-free system, proceed as
follows:
1. Activate the hands-free system by briefly
pressing the PHONE button in the center
console. If there is a cell phone connected,
symbol indicates that the hands-free
The
system is active.
Alternative 2–using the cell phone’s menus
disconnect it from the hands-free system
(by pressing PHONE in the center console
for several seconds).
2. Perform a search using the cell phone’s
Bluetooth® function (consult the cell
phone’s owner’s manual if necessary).
3. Select My Car in the list of devices shown
in the cell phone’s display.
4. When prompted, enter the PIN code 1234
in the cell phone.
04
5. Connect to My Car from the cell phone.
The cell phone will be registered and will be
connected automatically to the audio system
while the text Synchronizing is displayed. For
more information on synchronizing a cell
phone, see page 151.
When a connection has been established, the
symbol and the cell phone’s Bluetooth®
name will be displayed. The cell phone can
now be controlled from the audio system.
Making a call
1. Ensure thatPHONE is shown at the top of
the center console display and that the
symbol is visible (by pressing briefly on
PHONE on the center console).
2. Dial the desired phone number or use the
phone book (see page 151).
``
149
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
3. Press ENTER.
Handling calls
End the call by pressing EXIT.
Incoming calls
Disconnecting the cell phone
Press ENTER to answer a call, even if the
audio system is currently in e.g., CD or FM
mode.
Press EXIT to defer a call.
The cell phone is automatically disconnected
from the audio system if it is moved out of
range. For more information about connections, see page 149.
04
Automatic answer
The cell phone can be manually disconnected
from the hands-free system by pressing
PHONE. The hands-free system is also deactivated when the ignition is switched off (or if
the driver’s door is opened on vehicles equipped with the optional keyless drive).
This function means that incoming calls will be
answered automatically. Activate or deactivate
the function in the menu system under Phone
settings
Call options
Automatic
answer.
When the cell phone is disconnected from the
hands-free system, a call in progress can be
continued using the cell phone’s own speaker
and microphone.
Call settings
NOTE
Certain cell phones may require confirmation from the phone’s keypad when a call is
transferred from hands-free to the cell
phone.
While a call is in progress, press MENU or
ENTER on the center console to access the
following functions:
• Mute microphone–mute the audio system’s microphone.
• Transfer call to mobile–transfer the call
from hands-free to the cell phone.
• Phone book–this feature enables you to
search for a stored telephone number.
NOTE
•
On certain cell phones, the connection
is broken when the mute function is
used, which is normal. If this happens,
the hands-free system will prompt you
to reconnect.
•
A new call cannot be initiated while
another call is in progress.
Sound settings
Call volume
Call volume can be adjusted when the handsfree system is activated. Use the buttons in the
steering wheel keypad or the audio system’s
volume control.
Audio system volume
While a phone call is in progress, volume for
the audio system can be adjusted in the normal
way with the audio system's volume control. In
order to adjust volume during a phone call, the
audio system must be switched to one of the
other modes (FM, CD, etc).
Audio system sound can be automatically
muted when a phone call is received in Phone
Sounds and volume
settings
Mute radio and adjust the volume with the
/
keys on the center console.
150
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Ringing volume
Go to Phone settings
Sounds and
volume
Ring volume and adjust the volume with the
/
keys on the center console.
Ringing tones
The hands-free system’s integrated ringing
tones can be selected in Phone settings
Sounds and volume
Ring signals
Ring signal 1, etc.
NOTE
The connected cell phone’s ring tone is not
switched off when one of the hands-free
system's ringing tones is used.
If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’s
ring tone1, go to Phone settings
Sounds and volume
Ring signals
Use mobile phone signal
More information about registering
and connecting cell phones
A maximum of 5 cell phones can be registered
in the hands-free system. Registration only
needs to be done once for each phone. After
registration, the cell phone no longer needs to
be in sight or searchable. Only one cell phone
can be connected to hands-free at a time.
Phones can be unregistered in Bluetooth
Remove phone
Automatic connection
When the hands-free system is active and the
most recently connected cell phone is within
range, it is detected automatically. When the
audio system searches for the most recently
connected phone, this phone’s name appears
in the display. To manually connect a different
cell phone, press EXIT.
Manual connection
To connect a phone other than the one that
was most recently connected or to switch
between cell phones that are already registered in the hands-free system:
A connection can also be established in the
menu system under Bluetooth
Connect
phone
or
Change phone.
Phone book
In order to use the hands-free system’s phone
book (list of contacts), PHONE must be displayed at the top of the center console display
and the
symbol must be visible.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book of each registered cell phone. The phone
book is automatically copied each time a
phone is connected. This function can be actiSynchronize
vated in Phone settings
phone book. Searches for contacts are only
made in the phone book of the currently connected cell phone.
04
NOTE
If a particular cell phone does not support
copying of the phone book, List is empty
will be displayed when copying has been
completed.
1. Put the audio system in telephone mode.
2. Press PHONE in the center console and
select one of the phones on the list.
1
If the phone book contains information about
someone who is trying to call you, this information will be shown in the display.
Not supported by all cell phones.
``
151
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Searching for contacts
The easiest way to search for a contact in the
phone book is to press and hold any of the
buttons 2–9. This starts a search based on the
first letter on the button that has been pressed.
04
The phone book can also be accessed by
/
on the
pressing the navigation buttons
/
on the
center console or by pressing
steering wheel keypad. A search can also be
made in the phone book’s search menu in
Phone book
Search:
1. Enter the first letter of the contact’s name
and press ENTER or simply press ENTER.
2. Select the desired contact and press
ENTER to make a call to that person.
Voice mail number
The phone number to your voice mail can be
changed in the menu Phone settings
Call options
Voice mail number. If no
number has been stored, this menu can be
accessed by a prolonged press on button 1.
Once a phone number has been stored, press
and hold 1 to dial this number.
ted while the phone is connected. Press
ENTER to show the most recently dialed numbers. Other call lists can be found under Call
register.
NOTE
Certain cell phones display the list of the
most recently dialed numbers in reverse
order.
Entering text
Text is entered by using the number buttons in
the center console. Press a button once to
enter the first letter on the button, twice to enter
the second letter, etc. Continue to press the
button to display other characters.
Press EXIT briefly to erase a character. Press
and hold EXIT to erase all of the characters that
/
buttons on
have been entered. Use the
the center console to navigate among the characters.
Button
Function
Space .1-? ! , : " ' ( )
Call lists
Lists of calls in a particular cell phone are copied to the hands-free system each time that
phone is connected. These lists are then upda-
152
ABC2ÄÅÀÆÇ
DEF3ÈÉ
Button
Function
GHI4Ì
JKL5
MNO6ÑÖÒØ
PQRS7ß
TUV8ÜÙ
WXYZ9
Press briefly if two characters are
to be entered in succession from
the same button.
+0@*#&$£/%
Shift between uppercase and
lowercase letters
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Bluetooth® menus
1.
Missed calls
2.
Received calls
3
Dialed calls
4.
Phone book
5.
6.
4.1.
Search
4.2.
Copy fr. mobile phone
Bluetooth...
04
5.1.
Change phone
5.2.
Connect phone
5.3.
Disconnect phone
5.4.
Connect fr. mobile phone
Phone settings
6.1.
Call options
6.1.2.
Automatic answer
6.1.3.
Voice mail number
6.2.
Sounds and volume
6.3.
IDIS
6.4.
Synchronize phone book
153
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Introduction
Functions
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, this message must
be acknowledged in order to return to the
trip computer function. Acknowledge a
message by pressing READ.
G022909
04
Information display and controls
To change the unit of measure specified for
distance and speed, contact an authorized
Volvo workshop.
Average speed
READ–press to acknowledge/confirm/
erase a message)
The system calculates the average speed from
the last resetting. Reset using RESET.
Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip
computer menus)
Current speed in mph (Canadian models
only)
RESET–resets certain functions
This function provides the driver with an instantaneous conversion of the car's current speed
from km/h to mph.
To scroll through trip computer information,
move the thumb wheel up or down. Continue
turning to return to the starting point.
Current speed in km/h (U.S. models only)
This function provides the driver with an instantaneous conversion of the car's current speed
from mph to km/h.
Current fuel consumption
(Instantaneous)
Current fuel consumption is calculated every
second. The information on the display is
154
updated every few seconds. When the vehicle
is stationary, "----" appears on the display.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption since the last
reset. Reset using RESET.
Driving distance on current fuel reserve
This function shows the approximate distance
that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the
tank. The calculation is based on average fuel
consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km)
of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in
the tank when the reading was taken. When the
message ---- miles to empty tank appears in
the display, refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
The actual distance that can be driven on
the usable fuel remaining in the tank may be
influenced by a change in driving style.
See also page 204 for information on driving
economically.
Resetting
1. Select --- mph average speed or --.mpg average.
2. Press and hold RESET for approx. 1 second to reset the selected function. If
RESET is kept depressed for at 3 three
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
seconds, Average speed and Average fuel
consumption are reset simultaneously.
04
155
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Stability system
Introduction
Spin control (SC)
Temporarily switching off Spin control
The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control
system (DSTC) consists of a number of functions designed help reduce wheel spin, counteract skidding, and to generally help improve
directional stability.
The spin control function is designed to help
prevent the drive wheels from spinning while
the vehicle is accelerating.
1. Turn the thumbwheel (1) until the DSTC
menu is shown.
CAUTION
A pulsating sound will be audible when the
system is actively operating and is normal.
Under certain circumstances, such as when
driving with snow chains, or driving in deep
snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to
temporarily switch off this function for maximum tractive force.
WARNING
04
Traction control (TC)
This function is designed to help reduce wheel
spin by transferring power from a drive wheel
that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the
opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).
The car's handling and stability characteristics will be altered if the spin control function
has been disabled.
2. Hold down the RESET button (2) to toggle
between DSTC SPIN CONTROL ON/
OFF.
Symbols in the instrument panel
If the symbols
and
are displayed
at the same time, read the message in the
information display.
If the symbol
appear as follows:
appears alone, it may
• If the symbol flashes, this indicates that the
stability system is actively functioning to
help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.
Operation
TC is most active at low speeds.
• If the symbol remains on for approximately
This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and
cannot be switched off.
2 seconds after the engine has been
started, this indicates that the system is
performing a self-diagnostic test.
Active Yaw Control (AYC)
This function helps maintain directional stability, for example when cornering, by braking
one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows
a tendency to skid or slide laterally.
156
G021409
This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and
cannot be switched off.
WARNING
The stability system is intended to help
improve driving safety. It supplements, but
can never replace, the driver's judgment
and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always
be adapted to traffic and road conditions.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Stability system
Messages in the information display
DSTC Temporarily OFF – system function
has been temporarily reduced due to high
brake disc temperature. The function is activated automatically when the brakes have
cooled.
DSTC Service required – the system has
been disabled due to a fault. If this occurs:
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off
the engine.
04
2. Restart the engine.
If the message remains when the engine is
restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the system inspected.
Symbols in the instrument panel
If the symbols
and
are displayed
at the same time, read the message in the
information display.
If the symbol
appear as follows:
appears alone, it may
• If the symbol flashes, this indicates that the
stability system is actively functioning to
help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.
• If the symbol remains on for approximately
2 seconds after the engine has been
started, this indicates that the system is
performing a self-diagnostic test.
157
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Active chassis system–Four C*
Active chassis (Four C)
Operation
Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the characteristics of the shock absorbers so that the
car's driving characteristics can be adjusted.
There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and
Advanced.
Comfort
04
Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride
and the transmission shifts gears at lower rpm.
This mode is particularly suitable for long-distance highway driving. The indicator light in the
button will be on when this mode is selected.
Sport
In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is
reduced during cornering and steering
response is more immediate. The transmission
shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driving. The
indicator light in the button will be on to indicate that Sport mode has been selected.
Advanced
In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal
and steering response is very direct. Gear shifting is done at high rpm in each gear for
dynamic and active driving.
158
NOTE
This steering force level menu function cannot be accessed when the vehicle is in
motion.
Chassis settings
Use the buttons in the center console to
change setting. The setting in use when the
engine is switched off is activated the next time
the engine is started.
Speed-dependent steering force*
Steering force increases with the speed of the
vehicle to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.
At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer in
order to facilitate parking, etc.
Steering force can be changed under Car
Steering force level. For a
settings
description of the menu system, see
page 122.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Cruise control
Operation
> The symbol
illuminates and the text
(---) mph (5) indicates that cruise control is in standby mode.
NOTE
•
A temporary increase in speed by
pressing the accelerator pedal, for less
than 1 minute (e.g. when passing
another car), does not affect the current
cruise control setting. The vehicle will
automatically return to the previously
set speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
•
If one of the cruise control buttons is
kept depressed for more than approx.
1 minute cruise control is disengaged.
The engine must then be switched off in
order to reset cruise control.
NOTE
This does not set the vehicle's speed.
G022910
Setting a speed
Steering wheel-mounted controls and display
Standby mode
Resume set speed
Deactivating
Activate/set speed
Set speed indicator (parentheses indicate
standby mode)
Engaging the cruise control function
Before a speed can be set, the cruise control
system must be engaged (put in standby
mode).
Press the CRUISE button (1).
Use the
or
buttons set the vehicle's current speed. The set speed is shown in the display.
NOTE
Cruise control cannot be engaged at
speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).
Adjusting the set speed
04
Automatic deactivation
Cruise control is automatically deactivated
temporarily if one of the following occurs:
After a speed has been set, it can be increased
or decreased by using the
or
buttons.
• If the speed drops below approximately
1. Press and hold down
or
until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
> This will become the set speed when the
button is released.
•
•
•
•
2. Press
or
for approximately a half
second and release the button to increase
or decrease vehicle speed by approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
The currently set speed will be saved in the
system's memory.
20 mph (30 km/h).
When the brake pedal is depressed.
If the gear selector is moved to position N.
During wheel spin or wheel lock-up.
If the vehicle's speed is increased by using
the accelerator pedal for more than
1 minute.
``
159
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Cruise control
Temporary deactivation
The driver can temporarily deactivate cruise
control by pressing 0. The saved speed is
shown in brackets in the information display.
Resume set speed
If cruise control has been deactivated temporarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The
vehicle's speed returns to the most recently set
speed.
04
WARNING
There may be a significant increase in speed
after the
button has been pressed.
Deactivation
Cruise control is disengaged by pressing
CRUISE, or by switching off the engine. The
set speed is cleared.
WARNING
Cruise control should not be used in heavy
traffic or when driving on wet or slippery
roads. Cruise control may not maintain set
speed on steep downgrades.
160
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
When the driver has set the desired speed and
the time interval to the vehicle ahead, ACC
functions as follows:
•
Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover
all driving situations and traffic, weather
and road conditions. The "Function"
section provides information about limitations that the driver must be aware of
before using this feature.
•
This system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is
responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed and must intervene if
Adaptive Cruise Control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead.
• If there are no other vehicles in the lane
ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at the
set speed.
• If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower
moving vehicle in the lane ahead, the system will adapt your vehicle's speed to help
maintain the set time interval to the vehicle
ahead. When there are no longer slower
moving vehicles ahead, your vehicle will
accelerate to resume the set speed.
If ACC is switched off completely or in standby
mode and your vehicle comes too close to
another vehicle ahead, the driver will be
warned by the Distance Alert system (see
page 170).
Function
WARNING
•
Maintenance of ACC components may
only be performed by a trained and
qualified Volvo technician.
G021412
Introduction
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an optional
system designed to assist the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set time interval to the
vehicle ahead. It is primarily intended for use
on long straight roads in steady traffic, such as
on highways and other main roads.
04
Function overview
Warning light, braking by driver required
Controls in steering wheel
Radar sensor in front grille
Adaptive Cruise Control consists of:
• A cruise control system to maintain a set
speed
• A system to maintain a set distance to the
vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a
time interval. For example, you can choose
to remain approximately 2 seconds behind
the vehicle ahead. The actual distance
required to maintain a 2-second interval
will vary according the speed of the vehicles.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
161
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
WARNING
•
•
Adaptive Cruise Control does not react
to people or animals, or small vehicles
such as bicycles and motorcycles. It
also does not react to slow moving,
parked or approaching vehicles, or stationary objects.
The ACC system is designed to smoothly regulate speed. However, the driver must apply
the brakes in situations that require immediate
braking. This applies when there are great differences in speed between vehicles, or if the
vehicle ahead brakes suddenly.
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in
demanding driving conditions such as
city driving or other heavy traffic situations, in slippery conditions, when there
is a great deal of water or slush on the
road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor
visibility, on winding roads or on highway on- or off-ramps.
Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking may occur unexpectedly or not at all,
see page 165.
04
•
The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same
lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. Your vehicle's speed is regulated by accelerating and
braking. The brakes may emit a sound when
they are being modulated by the adaptive
cruise control system. This is normal.
162
WARNING
Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is
always responsible for applying the
brakes if the system does not detect
another vehicle.
The brake pedal moves when the adaptive
cruise control system modulates the
brakes. Do not rest your foot under the
brake pedal.
WARNING
Adaptive Cruise Control can only be put in
active mode at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h). If speed falls below 20 mph
(30 km/h) or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too
low, ACC disengages (goes into standby
mode) and will no longer modulate the brakes.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
When Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby
mode or is switched off completely, the
brakes will not be modulated automatically.
The driver must assume full control over the
vehicle.
Warning light—driver braking required
Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force
that is equivalent to approximately 25% of the
vehicle's total braking capacity. In situations
requiring more brake force than ACC can provide and if the driver does not apply the brakes,
an audible signal from the Collision Warning
system will sound and warning light will illuminate (see page 173) in the windshield to alert
the driver to react.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead may
make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
WARNING
Operation
Putting ACC in standby mode
Before ACC can be used to regulate speed
and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it must
first be put in standby mode.
Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor, see
page 165. In some cases there may be no
warning or the warning may be delayed. The
driver should always apply the brakes when
necessary.
To do so:
Press
The
symbol appears in the display and
parentheses (---) indicate that ACC is in
standby mode.
Steep inclines and/or heavy loads
ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly level
roads. The system may have difficulty maintaining the correct distance to a vehicle ahead
on steep inclines, if the vehicle is carrying a
heavy load or is towing a trailer. In these situations, the driver should always be prepared to
apply the brakes if necessary.
.
04
Setting a speed
Controls and display
Resume previous settings, increase speed
Standby mode on/off1
Once ACC has been put in standby mode, use
the
or
buttons to store (set) the vehicle's
current speed. This puts the system in active
mode. The set speed, for example 55 mph, is
shown in the display.
Set time interval
NOTE
Put in active mode and set a speed
Set speed (parentheses indicate standby
mode)
Adaptive cruise control cannot be put in
active mode at speeds below 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Time interval while it is being set
Time interval after it has been set
1
The driver's door must be closed and the driver's seat belt must be fastened before ACC can be put in standby mode
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
163
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
When the
symbol on the
left side of the display
changes to , the radar sensor has detected another
vehicle ahead. The distance
to a vehicle ahead is only
regulated when this symbol ( ) is illuminated.
Changing the set speed
04
After a speed has been set, it can be increased
or decreased by using the
or
buttons.
When the system is in active mode, the
button has the same function as , but results in
a smaller increase in speed.
NOTE
•
•
If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control
buttons is pressed for more than
approximately one minute, ACC will be
deactivated. The engine must then be
switched off and restarted to reset ACC.
In some situations Adaptive Cruise
Control cannot be put in active mode.
Cruise control Unavailable is shown
in the display, see page 168.
Setting a time interval
The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be
and decreased by
increased by pressing
pressing . The current time interval is shown
briefly in the display following adjustment.
Different time intervals can be
selected and are shown in the
display as 1–5 horizontal bars.
The greater the number of
bars, the longer the time interval. One bar represents a time
interval of approximately
1 second; 5 bars is approximately
2.5 seconds. At low speeds, when the distance
to the vehicle ahead is short, ACC increases
the time interval slightly. In order to follow the
vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC
allows the time interval to vary considerably in
certain situations.
WARNING
•
Only use a time interval that is suitable
in current traffic conditions.
•
A short time interval gives the driver limited reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic.
The number of bars indicating the selected
time interval are shown while the setting is
being made and for several seconds afterward.
A smaller version of the symbol is then shown
to the right in the display. The same symbol is
also displayed when Distance Alert is in active
mode, see page 170 .
Standby mode (temporary deactivation)
Press
to temporarily deactivate cruise control (put it in standby mode). The set speed, for
example 55 mph, is then shown in parentheses.
The previously set speed and time interval are
resumed by pressing
.
WARNING
There may be a significant increase in speed
after the
button has been pressed.
When ACC is in active mode, the vehicle’s
speed increases by approximately 1 mph
(1 km/h) each additional time
is pressed.
164
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Standby mode due to action by the driver
ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in
standby mode:
• when the brakes are applied
• if the gear selector is moved to N
• if the accelerator pedal is depressed for
more than 1 minute.
NOTE
If the accelerator pedal is only depressed for
a short time, such as when passing another
vehicle, ACC is deactivated temporarily and
is reactivated when the pedal is released.
• the vehicle's speed falls below 20 mph
WARNING
(30 km/h)
•
•
•
•
Accessories or other objects, such as extra
headlights, must not be installed in front of
the grille.
the wheels lose traction
brake temperature is high
engine speed (rpm) is too low or too high
the radar sensor is obstructed by, for
example, wet snow or rain.
The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles
ahead is impeded:
Turning ACC off completely
A short press on
in standby mode or a long
press in active mode turns ACC off completely.
The set speed and time interval are then
cleared from the system's memory and cannot
.
be resumed by pressing
In the event of automatic deactivation, an audible signal will sound and the message Cruise
control Cancelled is shown in the display.
The driver must then intervene and adapt the
vehicle's speed to the surrounding traffic and
regulate the distance to the vehicle ahead.
• if the radar sensor is obstructed and can-
04
not detect other vehicles, for example in
heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are
obscuring the radar sensor.
NOTE
Automatic standby mode
Adaptive cruise control is linked to other systems such as the stability and traction control
system (DSTC). If this system is not functioning
properly, adaptive cruise control is automatically deactivated and will go into standby
mode.
Modification of the radar sensor could make
its use illegal.
The radar sensor and its limitations
In addition to being used by ACC, the radar
sensor is also used by Distance Alert (see
page 170) and Collision Warning with Autobrake (see page 173). This sensor is designed
to detect cars or larger vehicles driving in the
same direction as your vehicle, in the same
lane.
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
clean.
• if the speed of vehicles ahead is significantly different from your own speed.
An automatic switch to standby mode may be
caused if:
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
165
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
In curves, the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
Situations where ACC may not function
optimally
WARNING
The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. In some situations it may detect
a vehicle later than expected or not
detect other vehicles at all.
•
If ACC is not functioning properly,
cruise control will also be disabled.
WARNING
•
Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover
all driving situations and traffic, weather
and road conditions. The "Function"
section provides information about limitations that the driver must be aware of
before using this feature.
•
This system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is
responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed and must intervene if
Adaptive Cruise Control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead.
•
Maintenance of ACC components may
only be performed by a trained and
qualified Volvo technician.
G021414
04
•
Radar sensor's field of vision (gray)
In certain situations, the radar sensor cannot detect vehicles at close quarters, for
example a vehicle that suddenly enters the
lane between your vehicle and the one that
the system has already detected.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the center of the lane
may remain undetected.
166
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
WARNING
•
Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is
always responsible for applying the
brakes if the system does not detect
another vehicle.
•
Adaptive Cruise Control does not react
to people or animals, or small vehicles
such as bicycles and motorcycles. It
also does not react to slow moving,
parked or approaching vehicles, or stationary objects.
•
Fault tracing and actions
If the message Radar blocked See manual is
displayed, this means that the radar signals
from the sensor have been obstructed and that
a vehicle ahead cannot be detected.
This, in turn, means that the functions of the
ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning
System with Auto-brake will not function.
The table lists possible causes for this message being displayed, and suitable actions.
04
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in
demanding driving conditions such as
city driving or other heavy traffic situations, in slippery conditions, when there
is a great deal of water or slush on the
road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor
visibility, on winding roads or on highway on- or off-ramps.
Cause
Action
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way.
Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the
radar.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
167
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Cause
Action
Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with
the radar signals.
No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect
the function of the radar.
The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that
it is no longer obstructed.
Symbols and messages in the display
04
Symbol
Message
Description
-
Standby mode or active mode when no other vehicle has been detected.
-
Active mode with a detected vehicle to which ACC is adapting speed/distance.
-
Time interval while it is being set.
-
Time interval after it has been set.
-
Turn on DSTC to enable
Cruise
ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC's Spin control is switched off. See
page 156 for more information.
-
Cruise control Cancelled
ACC has been automatically switched off.
The driver must regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the vehicle ahead.
-
Cruise control Unavailable
ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to:
• high brake temperature
• the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.)
168
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Symbol
Message
Description
Radar blocked See manual
ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot
detect other vehicles.
See page 165 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.
Cruise control Service
required
ACC is not functioning.
Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
169
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance Alert*
Introduction
NOTE
Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Control and is a function that provides information
about the time interval to the vehicle ahead.
04
Distance Alert is active at speeds above
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Time interval
information is only given for a vehicle that is
driving ahead of your vehicle in the same direction. No information is provided for vehicles
driving toward you, moving very slowly, or at a
standstill.
Setting a time interval
Distance Alert only monitors distance to the
vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise Control
is in active mode.
WARNING
Distance Alert only indicates the distance to
the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the
speed of your vehicle.
Operation
Controls and display
Time interval: Increase/decrease
Time interval: On, while it is being set
G017362
Time interval: On, after it has been set
to increase the interval or
Press
decrease it.
A smaller section of the red warning light in the
windshield glows steadily if your vehicle is
closer to the one ahead than the set time interval.
Press the button in the center instrument panel
to switch this function on or off. The indicator
light in the button illuminates when the function
is on.
170
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
to
Five different time intervals
can be selected and are
shown in the display as 1–5
horizontal bars. The greater
the number of bars, the longer
the time interval. One bar represents approximately
1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars is
approximately 2.5 seconds.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance Alert*
The number of bars indicating
the selected time interval are
shown while the setting is
being made and for several
seconds afterward. A smaller
version of the symbol is then
shown to the right in the display. The same symbol is displayed when
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is activated.
NOTE
•
•
WARNING
NOTE
Only use a time interval that is suitable in
current traffic conditions.
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead may
make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.
Limitations
Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor
used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Collision Warning system. See page 165 for more
information on the radar sensor’s limitations.
The higher your vehicle’s speed, the
greater the distance to the vehicle
ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a
given time interval.
WARNING
•
•
The set time interval is also used by
Adaptive Cruise Control, see page 163.
Bad weather or winding roads may
affect the radar sensor’s capacity to
detect vehicles ahead.
04
The size of the vehicle ahead, such as a
motorcycle, may also make it difficult to
detect. This may result in the warning
light illuminating at a shorter distance
than the one that has been set, or that
the light will not come on at all.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
Message
Description
-
Time interval while it is being set.
-
Time interval after it has been set.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
171
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance Alert*
Symbol
Message
Description
Radar blocked See manual
Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and
cannot detect other vehicles. See page 165 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.
Collision warn. Service
required
Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Auto-brake is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
04
172
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision warning with Auto-brake*
Introduction
Collision Warning consists of the following
three functions:
•
The collision warning system is not
designed to detect pedestrians.
•
Warnings are only provided when the
risk of collision is high. The "Function"
section provides information about limitations that the driver must be aware of
before using Collision Warning.
• Brake Support helps the driver brake efficiently in a critical situation.
• Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automatically if a collision cannot be avoided. Autobrake cannot prevent a collision but can
reduce the speed at which a collision
occurs.
•
WARNING
The auto-brake function cannot prevent a
collision but instead is intended to reduce
speed at the moment of impact. For full
braking effect, driver must apply the brakes.
Collision Warning does not work in all
driving, traffic, weather and road conditions. It does not react to vehicles not
traveling in the same direction as your
vehicle.
•
• Collision Warning warns the driver of a
potential collision situation.
performed by a trained and qualified
Volvo technician.
WARNING
•
•
The auto-brake function can help
reduce the speed at impact but the
driver should always apply the brakes
for the best possible braking effect,
even if auto-brake is actively applying
the brakes.
04
Function overview
Visual warning signal, collision risk
Never wait for a collision warning. This
system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is
responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed, even when the collision warning system is in use.
Maintenance of the Collision Warning
system's components must only be
Function
G017382
Collision Warning with Auto-brake is designed
to assist the driver if there is a risk of a collision
with a vehicle ahead that is at a standstill or
moving in the same direction as your vehicle.
Radar sensor
Camera
Collision Warning
The radar sensor and the camera work
together to detect stationary vehicles and vehicles that are moving in the same direction as
your vehicle. If there is a risk of collision, the
driver is alerted by a flashing red warning light
and an audible warning signal. Collision warning is active at speeds above 5 mph (7 km/h).
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
173
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision warning with Auto-brake*
Brake Support
Operation
If the risk of collision continues to increase after
the collision warning has been given, Brake
Support is activated. Brake Support prepares
the brake system to react quickly, and the
brakes are applied slightly. This may be experienced as a light tug.
Some settings are controlled from the center
console via a menu system.
If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking
effect will be provided, even if pressure on the
brake pedal is light.
04
Auto-brake
If a collision is imminent and the driver has not
applied the brakes or begun to steer around the
vehicle, the auto-brake function is activated
without the driver pressing the brake pedal.
Limited brake force is applied to reduce the
vehicle’s speed when the collision occurs. The
driver must apply the brakes for full braking
effect.
WARNING
The auto-brake function cannot prevent a
collision but instead is intended to reduce
speed at the moment of impact. For full
braking effect, driver must apply the brakes.
NOTE
The auto-brake function is always on and
cannot be turned off.
174
On and off
To switch Collision Warning on or off, go into
the menu Car settings
Collision
warning settings and select On or Off. When
the engine is started, the setting that was
selected when it was switched off will be used.
When the engine is switched on, the Collision
Warning setting that was being used when it
was switched off will be the default setting.
Activating/deactivating warning signals
The collision warning system’s audible and visual signals are activated automatically when
the engine is started if the collision warning
system is switched on.
The audible warning signal can be activated/
deactivated by selecting the alternative
Collision warning on or Collis'n warning
OFF in Car settings
Collision warning
settings
Warning sound.
Setting a warning distance
This setting determines the distance at which
the visual and audible warnings are triggered.
Select Long, Normal or Short underCar
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
settings
Collision warning settings
Warning distance
The warning distance determines the level of
sensitivity used by the system. The warning
distance Long provides an earlier warning.
Begin by using Long and if the system gives
too many warnings, try changing to Normal.
WARNING
•
The setting Short should only be used
in situations where traffic is light and
moving at low speeds.
•
Collision Warning alerts the driver to the
risk of a collision but this function cannot reduce the driver’s reaction time.
•
For Collision Warning to be as effective
as possible, it is recommended that Distance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see
page 170.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision warning with Auto-brake*
NOTE
•
•
When Adaptive Cruise Control is used,
the warning light and signal will be used
by that function, even if the warnings
provided by Collision Warning have
been deactivated by the driver.
In situations where traffic is moving at
considerably different speeds, or if the
vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warnings may be considered to be late, even
if the setting Long has been selected.
Checking settings
The current Collision Warning settings can be
checked by going into the menu system at Car
settings
Collision warning settings.
See page 122 for more information on the
menu system.
Limitations
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the visual
warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.
For this reason, always activate the audible
warning signal.
Slippery driving conditions increase braking
distance, which can reduce the system's
capacity to avoid a collision. In these condi-
tions, the ABS and DSTC systems provide the
best possible braking effect while helping to
maintain stability.
WARNING
•
In certain situations, the system cannot
provide warnings or warnings may be
delayed if traffic conditions or other
external factors make it impossible for
the radar sensor or camera to detect a
vehicle ahead.
•
Warnings may not be provided if the
distance to the vehicle ahead is short,
or if movements of the steering wheel/
brake pedal are great, such as during
active driving.
NOTE
The visual warning signal may be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature due to strong
sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the audible
warning signal will be used, even if it has
been deactivated in the menu system.
•
The sensor system has a limited range
for stationary or slow-moving vehicles
and may therefore give delayed or no
warnings if your vehicle’s speed is
above approximately 45 mph
(70 km/h).
•
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles may not be provided in dark
conditions.
04
The Collision Warning system uses the same
radar sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For
more information on the radar sensor and its
limitations, see page 165.
If no warning is given, or if a warning is delayed,
Auto-brake will also not be provided or will be
delayed.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
175
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision warning with Auto-brake*
NOTE
If warnings are given too frequently, the
warning distance can be reduced (see
page 174). This causes the system to provide later warnings, which decreases the
total number of warnings provided.
WARNING
•
The camera’s limitations
04
The camera is used by Collision Warning with
Auto-brake, Driver Alert Control (see
page 179), and Lane Departure Warning (see
page 182).
•
Never place any objects, decals, etc.,
on the windshield in front of the camera.
This could reduce or block the camera’s
function, and could cause one or more
of the systems that utilize the camera to
stop functioning.
•
Strong sunlight, reflections from the
road surface, ice or snow covering the
road, a dirty road surface, or unclear
lane marker lines may drastically reduce
the camera’s capacity to detect the side
of a lane or another vehicle.
NOTE
•
•
176
To help protect the camera in very hot
conditions, it may be temporarily
switched off for approximately 15
minutes after the engine has been
started.
The camera has the same limitations as
the human eye. In other words, its
“vision is impaired” by adverse weather
conditions such as heavy snowfall,
dense fog, etc. These conditions may
reduce the function of systems that
depend on the camera or cause these
systems to temporarily stop functioning.
Keep the section of the windshield in
front of the camera clean and free of ice,
snow, or condensation.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fault tracing and actions
If the message Windscreen Sensors
blocked is displayed, this means that the camera is obscured and cannot detect vehicles or
road marker lines in front of the vehicle.
This, in turn, means that Collision Warning with
Auto-brake, Lane Departure Warning, and
Driver Alert Control will not have full functionality.
The table lists possible causes for this message being displayed, and suitable actions.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision warning with Auto-brake*
Cause
Action
The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered
with ice or snow.
Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera.
Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera.
No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the
camera.
The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the
display.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to register
visibility.
The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is dirty.
Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this
surface cleaned.
04
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
Message
Description
Collis'n warning OFF
Collision Warning is switched off. This message is displayed when the engine is started and will disappear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the READ button.
Collision warn. Unavailable
Collision Warning cannot be activated. This message is displayed when the driver attempts to activate
the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the READ button.
Auto braking was activated
Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the READ button.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by
snow, ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see
page 176 for more information on the camera’s limitations.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
177
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision warning with Auto-brake*
Symbol
Message
Description
Radar blocked See manual
Collision Warning and Auto-brake are temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is blocked, for
example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect other
vehicles, see page 165 for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations.
Collision warn. Service
required
Collision Warning and Auto-brake are partially or completely not functioning.
Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.
04
178
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System*
Introduction
The Driver Alert System is designed to help a
driver who may be becoming fatigued or who
is inadvertently leaving the lane.
Driver Alert Control (DAC)–
introduction
DAC is designed to help detect a slowly changing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be
used on main roads and is not meant for use in
city traffic.
The Driver Alert System consists of two different functions that can be switched on together
or separately.
WARNING
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see
page 182
When one or both of the functions has been
switched on, it is in standby mode and is activated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of
40 mph (65 km/h).
The function deactivates if speed goes under
37 mph (60 km/h).
Both functions use a camera that is dependent
on the road/lane being clearly marked by painted lines on each side.
This function is intended to alert the driver if
his/her driving becomes erratic, such as if the
driver is distracted or fatigued.
DAC is not intended to extend the duration of driving. Always plan breaks at
regular intervals to help remain alert.
•
In certain cases, fatigue may not affect
the driver’s behavior. In situations of
this type, no warning will be provided.
Therefore, it is important to take breaks
at regular intervals, regardless of
whether or not DAC has given a warning.
04
Limitations
NOTE
In certain situations, DAC may provide warnings even if the driver’s driving pattern has not
become erratic.
The camera has certain limitations, see
page 165.
WARNING
The Driver Alert system does not function in
all situations and is designed to be a supplementary aid. It is not, however, intended
to replace the driver’s attention and judgement.
•
A camera monitors the painted lines marking
the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and
compares the direction of the road with the
driver’s movements of the steering wheel. The
driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow
the lane smoothly.
• if the driver is testing the LDW function
• in strong crosswinds
• on grooved road surfaces.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
179
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System*
Operating DAC
Thumb wheel. Turn this wheel until Driver
Alert is displayed. The second line shows
the alternatives Off, Unavailable, or [----], i.e., the number of bars.
Certain settings can be made from the menu
system controlled from the center instrument
panel.
The current system status can be checked on
the trip computer’s display by using the buttons on the left steering wheel lever.
READ button. Confirms and erases a message in the display.
WARNING
Activating DAC
In the center instrument panel, go to Car
settings and select Driver Alert on.
04
If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the
driver will be alerted by an audible signal and
the message Driver Alert, Time for a break is
displayed. The warning will be repeated after a
short time if the driving pattern remains the
same.
The function is activated when the
vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph
(65 km/h). The display will show level
markings of 1–5 bars, where a low
number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high
number of bars indicates stable driving.
•
An alert should be taken seriously since
it is sometimes difficult for a driver to
realize that he/she is fatigued.
•
In the event of a warning or if the driver
feels fatigued, stop as soon as possible
in a safe place and rest.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
Message
Description
-
Driver alert off
The function is not switched on.
-
Driver alert
The vehicle’s speed is below 37 mph (60 km/h) or the road lacks clear marking lines.
Unavailable
180
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System*
Symbol
Message
Description
Driver alert
The function is analyzing the driver’s driving pattern. The number of bars varies from 1–5, where a low
number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.
Driver Alert Time for a
break
The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area
of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 176 for information on the camera’s limitations.
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message
remains in the display.
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
181
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System*
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)–
introduction
Operation and function
below 37 mph (60 km/h), LDW will return to
standby mode and Lane Depart Warn
Unavailable will be displayed.
If the vehicle unexpectedly crosses the lane’s
left or right side marker lines, the driver will be
alerted by an audible signal.
No warning signal will be given in the following situations:
04
This function is designed to help reduce the
risk of accidents in situations where the vehicle
leaves its lane and there is a risk of driving off
the road or into the opposite lane. LDW consists of a camera that monitors the lane’s side
marker lines. The driver is alerted by an audible
signal if the vehicle crosses a side marker line
or the road’s center dividing line.
LDW can be switched on or off by pressing the
button on the center console. A light in the button illuminates when the function is on.
The trip computer display shows Lane Depart
Warn Unavailable when the function is in
standby mode.
When LDW is in standby mode, the function is
activated automatically after the camera has
monitored the road’s side marker lines and the
vehicle’s speed exceeds 40 mph (65 km/h).
Lane Depart Warn Available will be displayed.
If the camera can no longer monitor the road’s
side marker lines, or if the vehicle’s speed falls
1
182
A warning will be given even when Increased
sensitivity has been selected.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
•
•
•
•
The turn signal is being used
The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal1
The throttle pedal is pressed quickly
If the steering wheel is moved quickly
In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s
body to sway.
See page 176 for information on the camera’s
limitations.
WARNING
The driver will only be warned once for each
time the wheels cross a marker line. No
alarm will be given if a marker line is
between the wheels.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System*
Settings
Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be
made in the menu system under Car settings
Lane departure warning. See page
122 for more information on the menu system.
There are two alternatives:
On at start-up: This selection puts the function in standby mode each time the engine is
started. Otherwise, the system will be in the
mode that it was in when the engine was
switched off.
tem only needs to monitor lane marker lines on
one side of the vehicle to change status to
Lane Depart Warn Available.
Increased sensitivity: This selection increases the function’s sensitivity. Warnings will be
given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations
apply. When this setting is being used, the sys04
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
Message
Description
Lane departure warning ON/Lane
departure warning OFF
The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.
-
Lane Depart Warn Available
The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.
-
Lane Depart Warn Unavailable
Speed is below 37 mph (60 km/h) or if the road lacks clear marker lines.
Windscreen Sensors blocked
The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean
the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 176 for information on the camera’s
limitations.
Driver Alert Sys Service required
The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the
message remains in the display.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
183
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist*
Introduction
Function
04
This system is available in the rear bumper
only, or in both the front and rear bumpers.
WARNING
Park Assist is an information system, NOT a
safety system. This system is designed to
be a supplementary aid when parking the
vehicle. It is not, however, intended to
replace the driver's attention and judgement.
Park assist button
The system is activated automatically when the
vehicle is started. The indicator light in the button in the center console illuminates when the
system is on.
• The front park assist system is active from
the time the engine is started until the vehicle exceeds a speed of approximately
10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the
vehicle is backing up.
• Rear park assist is active when the engine
is running and reverse gear has been
selected.
184
Activating/deactivating
The system is activated automatically when the
vehicle is started.
The park assist system is designed to assist
you when driving into parking spaces, garages,
etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sensors located
in one or both bumpers to measure the distance to a vehicle, object, or a person who may
be close to the front or rear of your vehicle. An
audible signal and symbols in the audio system’s display indicate the distance to the
object.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press the Park assist button on the center
console to temporarily deactivate the system(s).
> The indicator light in the button will go
out when the system has been deactivated.
Park assist will be automatically reactivated the
next time the engine is started, or if the button
is pressed (the indicator light in the button will
illuminate).
NOTE
•
Front park assist is disengaged automatically when the parking brake is
applied.
•
If the vehicle is equipped with front and
rear park assist, both systems will be
deactivated by pressing the button.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist*
1
Active
2
Active
3
Active
Views in the display
Visual indicator
The audio system’s display gives an overview
of the vehicle’s position in relation to a
detected object.
The markers in the display indicate that one or
more of the four sensors has detected an
object. The greater the number of markers, the
closer the vehicle is to the object.
Display in a vehicle with rear park assist
only: An object has been detected by both of
the right rear sensors.
Display in a vehicle with both front and rear
park assist: Reverse gear is selected and no
objects have been detected in front of or
behind the vehicle.
Rear park assist
Audible signal
The Park Assist system uses an intermittent
tone that pulses faster as you come close to an
object, and becomes constant when you are
within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object
in front of or behind the vehicle (example 2 in
the illustration). If there are objects within this
distance both behind and in front of the vehicle,
the tone alternates between front and rear
speakers.
If the volume of another source from the audio
system is high, this will be automatically lowered.
G021423
Signals from the park assist system
04
The distance monitored behind the vehicle is
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal
comes from the rear speakers.
The system must be deactivated when towing
a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted
carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park
assist system's sensors.
NOTE
Rear park assist is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine
trailer wiring is used.
Display in a vehicle with both front and rear
park assist. The solid marker in this example
indicates that an object is closer than approximately 1 foot (30 cm) to the right front sensor.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
185
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist*
Faults in the system
Front park assist
Cleaning the sensors
If the information symbol illuminates and Park
assist syst Service required is shown on the
information display, this indicates that the system is not functioning properly and has been
disengaged. Consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
CAUTION
G021424
04
The distance monitored in front of the vehicle
is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible signal comes from the audio system's front
speakers.
In certain circumstances, the park assist
system may give unexpected warning signals that can be caused by external sound
sources that use the same ultrasound frequencies as the system. This may include
such things as the horns of other vehicles,
wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,
motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does
not indicate a fault in the system.
Location of the front sensors
It may not be possible to combine auxiliary
headlights and front park assist since these
lights could trigger the system's sensors.
NOTE
G021425
Front park assist is deactivated when the
parking brake is applied and or when the
gear selector is in the P position.
Location of the rear sensors.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
186
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist*
with water and a suitable car washing detergent.
Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause
incorrect warning signals.
NOTE
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,
snow, or ice, this could result in false warning signals from the park assist system.
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
187
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
Introduction
Function
PAC also shows guiding lines in the on-screen
image to indicate the direction that the vehicle
will take as it moves rearward, which helps
simplify parallel parking, backing into a tight
space or when attaching a trailer to the vehicle.
04
If the image on the screen seems too dark,
brightness can be increased with the thumb
wheel on the lighting panel.
NOTE
PAC can only be installed on vehicles equipped with the Volvo’s own navigation system
VNS.
WARNING
•
PAC is designed to be a supplementary
aid when parking the vehicle. It is not,
however, intended to replace the
driver’s attention and judgment.
•
The camera has blind spots where it
cannot detect objects or people behind
the vehicle.
•
Pay particular attention to people or animals that are close to the vehicle.
NOTE
The driver sees what is behind the vehicle and
if a person or animal should suddenly appear
from the side.
PAC is mounted on the rear of the trunk lid,
near the opening handle.
The camera has built-in electronics that help
reduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the image
shown on the screen is as natural as possible.
This may cause some objects on the screen to
“lean,” which is normal.
WARNING
Objects seen on the screen may be closer
than they appear to be.
188
Ambient lighting conditions
The camera automatically monitors the ambient lighting conditions behind the vehicle and
constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This may
cause the brightness and quality of the image
on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitivity to light
is increased in dark conditions or in bad
weather, which may affect image quality.
The Park Assist Camera uses the display on the
dashboard to show the area behind the car
while you are backing up.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
In order to function properly, the camera
lens should always be kept clean. This is
particularly important in bad weather. Keep
the lens free of dirt, ice or snow.
Using PAC
Activation
PAC is activated when the gear selector is
moved to R if the system is set to Automatic
under Parking camera settings in the menu
system.
If the Volvo Navigation System (VNS) is in use,
PAC will automatically override the navigation
system to show the camera's image on the
screen instead of navigation information, for as
long as reverse gear is selected.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
Deactivation
Move the gear selector from R to another position. There is a slight delay in the PAC system,
which means that the view from behind the
vehicle will remain on the screen for approximately 15 seconds after the gear selector has
been moved from the R position or until the
vehicle reaches a forward speed of 6 mph
(10 km/h). The screen will then revert to the
mode that it was in before R was selected and
will, for example, display navigation system
information.
Guiding lines
see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she
turns the steering wheel while backing up.
Marker line for a 1-foot (30-centimeter)
zone behind the vehicle
Marker line for the clear back-up zone
NOTE
When backing up with a trailer, the guiding
lines show the path that the vehicle will
take, not the trailer.
WARNING
Keep in mind that the image on the screen
only shows the area behind the vehicle. The
driver must always watch for people, animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides of
the vehicle when turning while backing up.
The solid line (1) indicates a zone within 1 ft
(30 centimeters) of the rear bumper.
The dashed line (2) indicates the clear zone of
approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the
bumper. These lines also indicate the outmost
limits that any object (door mirrors, corners of
the body, etc.) extends out from the vehicle ,
even when the it turns.
04
The "wheel tracks" (3) between the side marker
lines show where the wheels will roll and can
extend up to approximately 10.5 ft (3.2 m)
behind the bumper if there are no objects in the
way.
G000000
Marker lines
"Wheel tracks"
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were a path on the ground behind the vehicle
and are affected by the way in which the steering wheel is turned. This enables the driver to
The PAC system's lines
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
189
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
Vehicles equipped with Park Assist
Settings
To make PAC system settings, press the
MENU button in the center console control
panel and go to Main menu Car settings
and select one of the following:
Parking camera settings
• Mark Park Assist lines to display the sidelines while backing up.
• Mark Distance information to display the
G031931
04
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Park
Assist system, the distance to an object will be
indicated more exactly and colored markers in
the display indicate which of the sensor(s) has
detected the object.
intersecting lines while backing up.
Activating the system
• Mark Automatic to activate PAC each
time reverse gear is selected.
• Mark Off to turn off PAC completely.
Summary
• The camera is activated when the gear
selector is moved to R (this can be
changed in the settings menu) and the
image is shown on the navigation system's
display.
The markers change color (from yellow to
orange to red) as the vehicle comes closer to
the object.
190
Marker (color)
Distance to
object
Green
> 5 ft (1.5 m)
Yellow
5–1 ft (0.3–1.5)
Red
0–1 ft (0–0.3)
• When backing up, two solid lines are pro-
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
jected on the screen to show the path that
the vehicle's rear wheels will take. These
lines are affected by movements of the
steering wheel. The vehicle's approximate
outer dimension are shown by two dashed
lines.
• The graphic lines will not be displayed
when backing up with a trailer that is connected to the vehicle's electrical system.
• Objects on the ground that are closer than
1 ft (30 centimeters) cannot be detected by
the camera.
• The camera is active for approx.
5 seconds after the gear selector is moved
to R or until the vehicle's speed exceeds
6 mph (10 km/h).
• The optional Park Assist sensors and the
parking camera work together and information from the sensors is shown graphically on the display.
• If the Park Assist* system's sensors detect
a trailer, the camera will zoom in on the
trailer hitch to help position the trailer's
tongue correctly.
• The graphic lines shown on the screen
when the vehicle backs up can be disabled
in the settings menu.
• Automatic or manual zoom can be
selected in the settings menu.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
Limitations
Even if a fairly small section of the screen image
appears to be obstructed, this may mean that
a relatively large area behind the vehicle is hidden and objects there may not be detected
until they are very near the vehicle.
NOTE
Bicycle carriers or other accessories mounted on the trunk may obstruct the camera's
field of view.
04
Keep in mind
• Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and
snow. Remove ice and snow carefully to
avoid scratching the lens.
• Clean the lens regularly with warm water
and a suitable car washing detergent.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
191
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Blind Spot Information System*
Introduction
WARNING
•
BLIS is an information system, NOT a
warning or safety system.
•
BLIS does not eliminate the need for
you to visually confirm the conditions
around you, and the need for you to turn
your head and shoulders to make sure
that you can safely change lanes.
•
G021426
04
As the driver, you have full responsibility
for changing lanes in a safe manner.
BLIS camera
Indicator light
BLIS symbol
The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an
information system that indicates the presence
of another vehicle moving in the same direction
as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind
area."
CAUTION
The system is based on digital camera technology. The cameras are located beneath the
side-view mirrors.
When one (or both) of the cameras have
detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to
approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of
your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft.
(9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), see
the illustration, the indicator light in the door
panel illuminates. The light will glow continuously to alert the driver of the vehicle in the
blind area.
NOTE
The door panel indicator light illuminates on
the side of the vehicle where the system has
detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is
passed on both sides at the same time, both
lights will illuminate.
BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the
driver if a fault should occur with the system.
For example, if one or both of the system's
cameras are obscured, a message (see the
table on page 194) will appear in the information display in the instrument panel. If this
occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary,
the system can be temporarily switched off (for
instructions, see page 194).
The BLIS system should only be repaired by
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Areas monitored by BLIS Distance A = approx.
31 ft. (9.5 meters), Distance B = approx. 10 ft.
(3 meters)
192
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Blind Spot Information System*
When does BLIS function
Darkness
The system functions when your vehicle is
moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding
vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a
vehicle in the blind area must have its headlights on. This means, for example, that the
system will not detect a trailer without headlights that is being towed behind a car or truck.
When you pass another vehicle:
The system reacts when you pass another
vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h)
faster than that vehicle.
WARNING
When you are passed by another vehicle:
The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by
another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph
(70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.
WARNING
•
•
BLIS does not function in sharp curves.
•
If you are towing a wide trailer, this may
prevent the BLIS cameras from detecting other vehicles in adjacent lanes.
BLIS does not function when your vehicle is backing up.
NOTE
•
BLIS does not react to cyclists or
mopeds.
•
BLIS does not react to vehicles that are
standing still.
•
The BLIS cameras have the same limitation as the human eye. In other words,
their "vision is impaired" by adverse
weather conditions such as heavy
snowfall, intense light directly into the
camera, dense fog, etc.
If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occasionally even when there are no other vehicles in the blind area, this does not indicate
a fault in the system.
In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst.
Service required will be displayed.
The following are several examples of situations in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may
illuminate even when there are no other vehicles in the area monitored by the system.
04
Limitations
How BLIS functions in daylight and
darkness
In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s)
may illuminate even when there are no other
vehicles in the area monitored by the system.
Light reflected from a wet road surface
Daylight
BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehicles. The system is designed to help detect
motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,
motorcycles, etc.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
193
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Blind Spot Information System*
CAUTION
•
Clean the lenses carefully to avoid
scratching.
•
The lenses are electrically heated to
help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gently brush away snow from the lenses.
switched off, and a text message is displayed.
• BLIS can be switched on again by pressing
the button. The indicator light in the button
will illuminate and a new text message will
be displayed. Press the READ button (see
page 124) to erase the message.
BLIS system messages
04
The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light,
smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on
a highway
Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low
on the horizon
Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses
In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera
lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped
clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.
194
Switching BLIS on and off
BLIS is automatically activated when the ignition is switched on. The indicator lights will
provide confirmation by flashing 3 times.
• The system can be switched off by press-
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
ing the BLIS button in the center console
(see the illustration). The indicator light in
the button goes out when the system is
Text in the display
System status
Blind spot syst.
Service required
BLIS not functioning
properly. Contact an
authorized Volvo
service technician.
Blind spot syst.
camera blocked
BLIS camera
obscured. Clean the
lenses.
Blind-spot info
system ON
BLIS system on
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Blind Spot Information System*
Text in the display
System status
Blind-spot info
system OFF
BLIS system off
Blind spot syst.
Reduced function
The BLIS cameras'
function has been
reduced due to
weak or impaired
data transfer
between the BLIS
system's cameras
and the vehicle's
electrical system.
The cameras will
reset themselves
when this data
transfer has
returned to normal.
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
195
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience
Storage spaces
G024158
04
196
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience
Compartment in door panel
Tunnel console
Glove compartment
Storage pocket on the front edge of the
front seat cushions
Glove compartment
Storage compartment, 12-volt socket and
AUX input
Jacket holder
Rear seat cup holders
Jacket holder
The jacket hanger is located on the inboard
side of the front passenger's seat head
restraint. It is only intended for hanging light
garments.
04
G021436
Storage pocket
Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.) under
armrest.
Includes cup holder for driver and passenger, 12 V socket and small storage compartment.
The owner's manual and maps can be kept
here. There are also holders for pens and fuel
cards. The glove compartment can be locked
manually with the key blade, see page 63.
``
197
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience
Vanity mirror
12-volt sockets
socket to supply current, the ignition must be
in at least mode I, see page 78.
The auxiliary socket can also be used to power
a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette lighters
and ashtrays can be purchased from your
Volvo retailer.
WARNING
G021438
04
G021439
Always keep the sockets covered when not
in use.
12-volt socket in the trunk*
Vanity mirror with lighting
12-volt socket in the front tunnel console
G021440
G021442
The light comes on automatically when the
cover is lifted.
12-volt socket in the rear center console
The electrical socket can be used for 12-volt
accessories such as cell phone chargers and
coolers. The maximum current is 10 A. For the
198
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fold down the cover to access the electrical
socket.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience
NOTE
The 12-volt socket in the trunk provides
electrical current even when the ignition is
switched off. Using the socket while the
engine is not running will drain the battery.
04
199
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience–S80 Executive
The refrigerator is located behind the rear center armrest and has a volume of 12.2 qts.
(11.5 liters). It functions when the engine is running or when the ignition is in mode II
Glasses
If the vehicle is equipped with a refrigerator, the
rear seat backrests must be folded down
slightly before the carpet on the floor of the
trunk can be removed, see page 84.
G021859
G021857
04
Carpet in the trunk
G021858
Refrigerator
There is a storage compartment under the
cover in the rear center armrest for two glasses
and a bottle opener.
WARNING
WARNING
Bottles kept in the refrigerator should be
firmly sealed and the refrigerator's door
must be securely closed while the vehicle is
in motion.
NOTE
The refrigerator requires free air circulation
in order to function at its best. At least
2 inches (5 cm) of free space should be left
around the refrigerator's air intake in the
trunk.
200
Keep the glasses in their storage compartment when not in use or in the cup holders
provided. The cover on the armrest should
be closed when the vehicle is in motion.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
04
201
Driving recommendations.....................................................................
Refueling...............................................................................................
Loading.................................................................................................
Towing a trailer......................................................................................
Emergency towing................................................................................
202
204
208
213
216
218
DURING YOUR TRIP
05 During your trip
Driving recommendations
General information
• Remove snow tires when threat of snow or
WARNING
ice has ended.
Economical driving conserves natural
resources
• Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,
Better driving economy may be obtained by
thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops
and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to
immediate traffic conditions.
• At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-
increase air resistance and also fuel consumption.
tion will be lower with the air conditioning
on and the windows closed than with the
air conditioning off and the windows open.
Observe the following rules:
• Bring the engine to normal operating tem-
05
perature as soon as possible by driving
with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for
the first few minutes of operation. A cold
engine uses more fuel and is subject to
increased wear.
• Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle
for driving short distances. This does not
allow the engine to reach normal operating
temperature.
• Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration
and hard braking.
• Use the transmission's Drive (D) position
as often as possible and avoid using kickdown.
• Do not exceed posted speed limits.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra
load) in the vehicle.
• Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire
pressure regularly (when tires are cold).
204
• Using the onboard trip computer's fuel
consumption modes can help you learn
how to drive more economically.
Other factors that decrease gas mileage
are:
•
•
•
•
Dirty air cleaner
Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter
Dragging brakes
Incorrect front end alignment
Some of the above mentioned items and others
are checked at the standard maintenance
intervals.
Driving with the trunk open: Driving with
the trunk open could lead to poisonous
exhaust gases entering the passenger compartment. If the trunk must be kept open for
any reason, proceed as follows:
•
•
Close the windows
Set the ventilation system control to air
flow to floor, windshield and side windows and the blower control to its highest setting.
Weight distribution affects handling
At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a
tendency to understeer, which means that the
steering wheel has to be turned more than
might seem appropriate for the curvature of a
bend. This ensures good stability and reduces
the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that
these properties can alter with the vehicle load.
The heavier the load in the trunk, the less the
tendency to understeer.
Handling, roadholding
Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure
all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check
that the tires are inflated to the recommended
pressure according to the vehicle load. See the
"Tire pressure" section. Loads should be distributed so that capacity weight or maximum
permissible axle loads are not exceeded.
05 During your trip
Driving recommendations
Driving through water
• The vehicle can be driven through water up
CAUTION
to a depth of approximately 10 in. (25 cm),
at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).
•
Engine damage will occur if water is
drawn into the air cleaner.
• Take particular care when driving through
•
If the vehicle is driven through water
deeper than 10 in (25 cm), water may
enter the differential and the transmission. This reduces the oil's lubricating
capacity and may shorten the service
life of these components.
flowing water.
• Clean the electrical connections for trailer
wiring after driving in mud or water.
• When driving through water, maintain low
speed and do not stop in the water.
•
Do not allow the vehicle to stand in
water up to the door sills longer than
absolutely necessary. This could result
in electrical malfunctions.
•
If the engine has been stopped while the
vehicle is in water, do not attempt to
restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of
the water.
WARNING
After driving through water, press lightly on
the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes
are functioning normally. Water or mud can
make the brake linings slippery, resulting in
delayed braking effect.
Engine and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example when
driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with
heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and
cooling system will overheat. Proceed as follows to avoid overheating the engine.
• Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep hills.
• Do not turn the engine off immediately
when stopping after a hard drive.
WARNING
The cooling fan may start or continue to
operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine
has been switched off.
• Remove any auxiliary lights from in front of
the grille when driving in hot weather conditions.
• Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm
if driving with a trailer in hilly terrain. The oil
temperature could become too high.
Conserving electrical current
Keep the following in mind to help minimize
battery drain:
05
• When the engine is not running, avoid
using ignition mode II. Many electrical systems (the audio system, the optional navigation system, power windows, etc) will
function in ignition modes 0 and I. These
modes reduce drain on the battery.
• Please keep in mind that using systems,
accessories, etc., that consume a great
deal of current when the engine is not running could result in the battery being completely drained. Driving or having the
engine running for approximately
15 minutes will help keep the battery
charged.
``
205
05 During your trip
Driving recommendations
Before a long distance trip
As a minimum, the following items should be
checked before any long trip:
• Make sure that the engine coolant contains
fuel consumption is normal.
•
•
•
•
•
Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage
Have the transmission oil level checked.
Check condition of drive belts.
Check state of the battery's charge.
Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as
well), and replace those that are worn.
Check tire pressures.
• The brakes, front wheel alignment, and
steering gear should be checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.
• Check all lights, including high beams.
• Reflective warning triangles are legally
required in some states/provinces.
• Have a word with a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician if you intend to
drive in countries where it may be difficult
to obtain the correct fuel.
206
driving through an area where snow or ice
are likely to occur, consider snow tires.
Cold weather precautions
• Check that engine runs smoothly and that
05
• Consider your destination. If you will be
It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle
checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before driving long distances.
Your retailer will also be able to supply you with
bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for
your use in the event that problems occur.
If you wish to check your vehicle before the
approach of cold weather, the following advice
is worth noting:
50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture
will reduce freeze protection. This gives
protection against freezing down to
–31 °F (–35 °C). The use of "recycled" antifreeze is not approved by Volvo. Different
types of antifreeze must not be mixed.
• Volvo recommends using only genuine
Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.
• Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this
helps prevent the formation of condensation in the tank. In addition, in extremely
cold weather conditions it is worthwhile to
add fuel line de-icer before refueling.
• The viscosity of the engine oil is important.
Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves
cold-weather starting as well as decreasing fuel consumption while the engine is
warming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, particularly the synthetic type, is recommended. Be sure to use good quality oil but
do not use cold-weather oil for hard driving
or in warm weather, see page 295 for more
information on engine oil.
NOTE
Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is
changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at additional charge.
• The load placed on the battery is greater
during the winter since the windshield wipers, lighting, etc. are used more often.
Moreover, the capacity of the battery
decreases as the temperature drops. In
very cold weather, a poorly charged battery can freeze and be damaged. It is therefore advisable to check the state of charge
more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil
on the battery posts.
• Volvo recommends the use of snow tires
on all four wheels for winter driving, see
page 235.
• To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from
freezing, add washer solvents containing
antifreeze. This is important since dirt is
often splashed on the windshield during
winter driving, requiring the frequent use of
the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer
Solvent should be diluted as follows: Down
to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and
4 parts water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part
washer solvent and 3 parts water Down to
0 °F (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and
05 During your trip
Driving recommendations
2 parts water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C):
1 part washer solvent and 1 part water.
• Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.
• Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can
cause damage to the locks.
05
207
05 During your trip
Refueling
Fuel requirements
Deposit control gasoline (detergent
additives)
Volvo recommends the use of detergent gasoline to control engine deposits. Detergent
gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and
intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit
control gasolines will help ensure good drivability and fuel economy. If you are not sure
whether the gasoline contains deposit control
additives, check with the service station operator.
NOTE
05
Volvo does not recommend the use of external fuel injector cleaning systems.
Unleaded fuel
Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter
and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and
Canadian regulations require that pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be labelled "UNLEADED". Only these pumps have nozzles which
fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled
"unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline
damages the three-way catalytic converter and
the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated
use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective-
208
ness of the emission control system and could
result in loss of emission warranty coverage.
State and local vehicle inspection programs
will make detection of misfueling easier, possibly resulting in emission test failure for misfueled vehicles.
sonal air quality standards, some areas require
the use of "oxygenated" fuel.
Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygenated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed
on page 209 must still be met.
Alcohol – Ethanol
NOTE
Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain
an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission
Control System performance may be affected, and the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator light) located on your instrument panel may light. If this occurs, please
return your vehicle to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for service.
Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,
"Oxygenated fuels"
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or
ethers. In some areas, state or local laws
require that the service pump be marked indicating use of alcohols or ethers. However,
there are areas in which the pumps are
unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is
alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check
with the service station operator. To meet sea-
Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume
may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to
as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".
Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to
15% MTBE may be used.
Methanol
Do not use gasolines containing methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice
can result in vehicle performance deterioration
and can damage critical parts in the fuel system. Such damage may not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
05 During your trip
Refueling
Octane rating
change gasoline brands to fully utilize your
engine's capacity, and for the smoothest possible operation.
Minimum octane
NOTE
When switching to higher octane fuel or
changing gasoline brands, it may be necessary to fill the tank more than once before a
difference in engine operation is noticeable.
G028920
Fuel Formulations
Typical pump octane label
Volvo recommends premium fuel for best performance, but using 87 octane1 or above will
not affect engine reliability.
Volvo engines are designed to achieve rated
horsepower, torque, and fuel economy performance using premium 91 octane fuel.
Demanding driving
In demanding driving conditions, such as operating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer,
or driving for extended periods at higher altitudes than normal, it may be advisable to
switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to
1
Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a
knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.
Besides damaging the exhaust emission control systems on your vehicle, lead has been
strongly linked to certain forms of cancer.
Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.
Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to
certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area
where you must fill your own gas tank, take
precautions. These may include:
• standing upwind away from the filler nozzle
while refueling
• refueling only at gas stations with vapor
Use of Additives
With the exception of gas line antifreeze during
winter months, do not add solvents, thickeners, or other store-bought additives to your
vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.
Overuse may damage your engine, and some
of these additives contain organically volatile
chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself
to these chemicals.
WARNING
Never carry a cell phone that is switched
on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone
rings, this may cause a spark that could
ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and
injury.
05
WARNING
Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,
and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust
gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes
inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger
compartment is ventilated, and immediately
return the vehicle to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for correction.
recovery systems that fully seal the mouth
of the filler neck during refueling
• wearing neoprene gloves while handling a
fuel filler nozzle.
AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.
``
209
05 During your trip
Refueling
tral locking button does not lock the fuel
filler door.
Opening/closing the fuel filler door
Manually opening the fuel filler door
• Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed
and is completely closed after refueling.
• Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot
weather.
Close the fuel filler door by pressing it a click
indicates that it is closed.
•
05
The fuel filler door is located on the right rear
fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel
)
tank symbol on the information display
With the ignition switched off, press and
release the button on the lighting panel to
unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the
fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the
vehicle begins to move forward. An audible
click will be heard when the fuel filler door
relocks.
• If you intend to leave your vehicle while it
is being refueled, this feature enables you
to lock the doors/trunk while leaving the
fuel filler door unlocked.
• You can also keep the vehicle locked if you
remain inside it during refueling. The cen-
210
Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.
In addition to causing damage to the
environment, gasolines containing
alcohol can cause damage to painted
surfaces, which may not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
G024631
CAUTION
If necessary, the fuel filler door can be opened
manually:
1. Open the side hatch in the trunk (on the
same side as the fuel filler door).
2. Grasp the green cord with a handle.
3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until
the fuel filler door clicks open.
05 During your trip
Refueling
Opening/closing the fuel cap
CAUTION
•
G022915
•
Do not refuel with the engine running2.
Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the
ignition is on, an incorrect reading could
occur in the fuel gauge.
Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not
press the handle on the filler nozzle
more than one extra time. Too much fuel
in the tank in hot weather conditions can
cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling
could also cause damage to the emission control systems.
• Do not park your vehicle over combustible
materials, such as grass or leaves, which
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system and cause such materials to ignite
under certain wind and weather conditions.
• Excessive starter cranking (in excess of
one minute), or an intermittently firing or
flooded engine can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating.
• Remember that tampering or unauthorized
Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the
filler cap slowly.
Emission controls
After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise until it clicks into place.
Three-way catalytic converter
• Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain
engine malfunctions, particularly involving
the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition
systems, may cause unusually high threeway catalytic converter temperatures. Do
not continue to operate your vehicle if you
detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of
power or other unusual operating conditions, such as engine overheating or backfiring. A properly tuned engine will help
2
avoid malfunctions that could damage the
three-way catalytic converter.
modifications to the engine, the Engine
Control Module, or the vehicle may be illegal and can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating. This
includes: altering fuel injection settings or
components, altering emission system
components or location or removing components, and/or repeated use of leaded
fuel.
05
NOTE
Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with
three-way catalytic converters.
If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's
performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.
``
211
05 During your trip
Refueling
Heated oxygen sensors
The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxygen content of the exhaust gases. Readings
are fed into a control module that continuously
monitors engine functions and controls fuel
injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine
is continuously adjusted for efficient combustion to help reduce harmful emissions.
05
212
05 During your trip
Loading
To increase loading space, the rear seat backrests can be folded down, see page 83.
When loading the trunk, keep the following in
mind:
The trunk lid can be unlocked an popped open slightly via the button
located on the lighting panel, see page 64.
• Load objects in the trunk against the backrest whenever possible.
• Unstable loads can be secured to the load
WARNING
•
Stop the engine, put the gear selector in
P, and apply the parking brake when
loading or unloading long objects.
•
The vehicle's driving characteristics
may change depending on the weight
and distribution of the load.
•
A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a
force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a
head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).
•
The rear seat should not be loaded to a
level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the
upper edge of the rear side windows.
Objects placed higher than this level
could impede the function of the Volvo
Inflatable Curtain.
Load anchoring eyelets
G021462
Introduction
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is
determined by factors such as the number of
passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight
of any accessories that may be installed, etc.
The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of the
vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to help
anchor items in the trunk.
05
anchoring eyelets with straps or web lashings to help keep them from shifting.
• Stop the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading or unloading long
objects. The gear selector can be knocked
out of position by long loads, which could
set the vehicle in motion.
Folding down the rear seat backrests
The rear seat backrests can be folded down for
additional loading space. See page 84 for information.
``
213
05 During your trip
Loading
The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags
in place.
WARNING
•
Cover sharp edges on long loads to help
prevent injury to occupants. Secure the
load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops.
•
Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seat belt or cargo retaining
straps.
•
Always secure the load to help prevent
it from moving in the event of sudden
stops.
•
Switch off the engine, apply the parking
brake and put the gear selector in P
when loading and unloading the vehicle.
1. Open the hatch in the floor of the trunk.
2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.
Ski hatch
05
Grocery bag holder*
There is a hatch in the right section of the rear
seat backrest that can be opened for transportation.
Fold the right backrest forward.
Release the hatch in the rear seat backrest
by sliding the catch up while folding the
hatch forward.
Return the backrest to the upright position
with the hatch open.
G021463
Use the seat belt to prevent the load from moving.
Grocery bag holder under the floor of the trunk
214
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 During your trip
Loading
WARNING
•
•
Always secure the load to help prevent
it from moving in the event of sudden
braking.
Switch off the engine, apply the parking
brake and put the gear selector in P
when loading and unloading the vehicle.
Volvo has developed especially for your
vehicle.
• Volvo-approved removable roof racks are
designed to carry the maximum allowable
roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg).
For non-Volvo roof racks, check the manufacturer's weight limits for the rack.
• Never exceed the rack manufacturer's
weigh limits and never exceed the maximum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg).
The cover on the rear seat armrest/child seat
has no hinge. The cover must be removed
before the ski hatch is used.
• Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads
Removal:
• Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the
Open the cover 30 degrees and lift straight
up.
Installation:
Insert the cover in the grooves behind the
upholstery and close the cover.
Roof loads
Using load carriers
Load carriers are available as Volvo accessories. Observe the following points when in use:
• To avoid damaging your vehicle and to
evenly.
load.
• Secure the cargo correctly with appropri-
05
ate tie-down equipment.
• Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured.
• Remember that the vehicle's center of
gravity and handling change when you
carry a load on the roof.
• The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel consumption will increase with the size of the
load.
• Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast
cornering and hard braking.
achieve maximum safety when driving, we
recommend using the load carriers that
215
05 During your trip
Towing a trailer
Introduction
Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer
hitches that are specially designed for the vehicle.
when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain.
Use a lower gear and turn off the air conditioner if the temperature gauge needle
enters the red range.
WARNING
•
Bumper-attached trailer hitches must
not be used on Volvos, nor should
safety chains be attached to the
bumper.
•
Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle
rear axle must not be used.
•
Never connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to the vehicle
brake system, nor a trailer's lighting
system directly to the vehicle lighting
system. Consult your nearest authorized Volvo retailer for correct installation.
•
When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety
wire must be correctly fastened to the
hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch
on the vehicle. The safety wire should
never be fastened to or wound around
the drawbar ball.
• If the automatic transmission begins to
NOTE
See page 291 for the maximum trailer and
tongue weights recommended by Volvo.
• Observe the legal requirements of the
state/province in which the vehicles are
• All Volvo models are equipped with
05
energy-absorbing shock-mounted bumpers. Trailer hitch installation should not
interfere with the proper operation of this
bumper system.
Trailer towing does not normally present any
particular problems, but take into consideration:
• Increase tire pressure to recommended full
pressure. See the tire inflation tables
beginning on page 227.
• When your vehicle is new, avoid towing
heavy trailers during the first 620 miles
(1,000 km).
• Maximum speed when towing a trailer:
50 mph (80 km/h).
• Engine and transmission are subject to
increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant
temperature should be closely watched
216
overheat, a message will be displayed in
the text window.
• Avoid overload and other abusive operation.
• Hauling a trailer affects handling, durability, and economy.
• It is necessary to balance trailer brakes
with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a
safe stop (check and observe state/local
regulations).
• Do not connect the trailer's brake system
directly to the vehicle's brake system.
• More frequent vehicle maintenance is
required.
• Remove the ball and drawbar assembly
when the hitch is not being used.
• Volvo recommends the use of synthetic
engine oil when towing a trailer over long
distances or in mountainous areas.
05 During your trip
Towing a trailer
NOTE
•
•
•
•
4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch
assembly/ball holder.
When parking the vehicle with a trailer
on a hill, apply the parking brake before
putting the gear selector in P. Always
follow the trailer manufacturer's recommendations for wheel chocking.
5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end
of the locking bolt.
Removing the ball holder
When starting on a hill, put the gear
selector in D before releasing the parking brake. See also page 118 for more
detailed information about starting off
on a hill while towing a trailer.
C
If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift
positions while towing a trailer, make
sure the gear you select does not put
too much strain on the engine (using too
high a gear).
A
The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may
be rated for trailers heavier than the
vehicle is designed to tow. Please
adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer
weights.
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 15 %.
Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer
hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has
7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved by
Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on
the ground.
1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt
and slide the locking bolt out of the ball
holder/hitch assembly.
D
E
B
G010496
•
Detachable trailer hitch (accessory)
2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assembly.
NOTE
Ball holder
Locking bolt
A cover for the hitch assembly is also
included in the kit.
05
Cotter pin
Hitch assembly
Safety wire attachment
Installing the ball holder
1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from
the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt
out of the hitch assembly.
2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assembly.
3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one
in the hitch assembly.
217
05 During your trip
Emergency towing
• If the cover has a notch, insert a coin,
Towing eyelet
etc., into the notch and pry open the
edge of the cover. Open the cover completely and remove it.
• If the cover has a mark along one edge
G021500
or in a corner, press the mark while prying out the opposite side/corner using a
coin, etc. Open the cover and remove it.
Press the cover for the attachment point back
into position.
NOTE
Attaching the towing eyelet
Attaching the towing eyelet
The towing eyelet is located under the floor
of the trunk, with the spare tire. This eyelet
must be screwed into the positions provided on the right sides of either the front or
rear bumper (see illustration).
There are two different types of covers over
the openings for the towing eyelet and they
have to be opened differently.
218
WARNING
•
Remember that the power brakes and
power steering will not function when
engine is not running. The braking and
steering systems will function but considerably higher pressure will be
required on the brake pedal and greater
steering effort must be exerted.
•
The towing eyelets must not be used for
pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for
any similar purpose involving severe
strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to
pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow
truck.
Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by hand
and then using the tire iron until it is securely in
place.
After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet
should be removed and returned to its storage
location.
05
CAUTION
If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed
truck, the towing eyelets must not be used
to pull the vehicle up onto the flat bed.
On certain models equipped with a trailer
hitch, the towing eyelet cannot be screwed
into the hole in the rear bumper. The towing
rope should be attached to the trailer hitch
instead. For this reason, the detachable
section of the trailer hitch should be safely
stowed in the vehicle at all times.
Precautions when the vehicle is in tow
• Attach jumper cables (see page 110) to
provide current for releasing the optional
electric parking brake and to move the gear
selector from the P position.
• The gear selector must be in position N.
• Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not
exceed the maximum allowable towing
speed.
05 During your trip
Emergency towing
• Maximum distance with front wheels on
• While the vehicle is being towed, try to
•
keep the tow rope taut at all times.
• The vehicle should only be towed in the
forward direction.
WARNING
NOTE
During towing, ignition mode II should be
used so that the lighting can be switched on.
CAUTION
Vehicles with AWD (All Wheel Drive) with the
front wheels off the ground should not be
towed at speeds above 50 mph (70 km/h) or
for distances longer than 30 miles (50 km).
Please check with state and local
authorities before attempting this type
of towing, as vehicles being towed are
subject to regulations regarding maximum towing speed, length and type of
towing device, lighting, etc.
•
If the vehicle's battery is dead, do not
attempt to start the vehicle by pushing
or pulling it as this will damage the
three-way catalytic converter(s). The
engine must be jump started using an
auxiliary battery (see page 110).
•
If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed
truck, the towing eyelets must not be
used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat
bed or to secure the vehicle on the flat
bed. Consult the tow truck operator.
The ignition key should always be fully
inserted in the ignition slot when the vehicle
is being towed to help prevent the steering
wheel from locking.
On vehicles with the optional keyless drive,
the remote key must be in the passenger
compartment and the driver's door must be
closed.
please refer to the towing information on
page 218.
CAUTION
ground: 50 miles (80 km).
CAUTION
•
Sling-type equipment applied at the
front will damage radiator and air conditioning lines.
•
It is equally important not to use slingtype equipment at the rear or apply lifting equipment inside the rear wheels;
serious damage to the rear axle may
result.
•
If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed
truck, the towing eyelets must not be
used to secure the vehicle on the flat
bed. Consult the tow truck operator.
05
Towing vehicles with front wheel drive/
All Wheel Drive
Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equipment.
• If wheel lift equipment must be used,
please use extreme caution to help avoid
damage to the vehicle. In this case, the
vehicle should be towed with the rear
wheels on the ground if at all possible.
• If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground,
219
General information ..............................................................................
Tire inflation...........................................................................................
Inflation pressure—U.S. models ..........................................................
Inflation pressure—Canadian models...................................................
Tire designations ..................................................................................
Glossary of tire terminology .................................................................
Vehicle loading .....................................................................................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...............................................................
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires ...............................................
Temporary Spare .................................................................................
Tire Sealing System..............................................................................
Changing a wheel ................................................................................
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).............................................
220
222
225
227
228
229
231
232
234
235
236
237
243
246
WHEELS AND TIRES
06 Wheels and tires
General information
Introduction
Your vehicle is equipped with tires according
to the vehicle's tire information placard on the
B-pillar (the structural member at the side of
the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door
opening).
CAUTION
Some Volvo models are equipped with an
Ultra High Performance tire and wheel combination designed to provide maximum dry
pavement performance with consideration
for hydroplaning resistance. They may be
more susceptible to road hazard damage
and, depending on driving conditions, may
achieve a tread life of less than 20,000 miles
(30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equipped
with Volvo’s advanced AWD or DSTC system, these tires are not designed for winter
driving, and should be replaced with winter
tires when weather conditions dictate.
06
The tires have good road holding characteristics and offer good handling on dry and wet
surfaces. It should be noted however that the
tires have been developed to give these features on snow/ice-free surfaces.
Most models are equipped with "all-season"
tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree
of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires
1
222
Option or accessory on some models
without the "all-season" rating. However, for
optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered
roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on
all four wheels.
Tire age
When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires
are the same size designation, type (radial) and
preferably from the same manufacturer, on all
four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering
the car's roadholding and handling characteristics.
Tires degrade over time, even when they are
not being used. It is recommended that tires
generally be replaced after 6 years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent
high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.)
exposure can accelerate the aging process.
The temporary spare1 should also be replaced
at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been
used.
New Tires
A tire's age can be determined by the DOT
stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).
A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration
should be replaced immediately.
Improving tire economy
• Maintain correct tire pressure. See the tire
inflation tables beginning on page 227.
• Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard
braking and tire screeching.
• Tire wear increases with speed.
• Correct front wheel alignment is very
important.
Remember that tires are perishable goods. As
of 2000, the manufacturing week and year
(Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp)
will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1510 means
that the tire illustrated was manufactured during week 15 of 2010).
• Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy
and driving comfort.
• Tires must maintain the same direction of
rotation throughout their lifetime.
06 Wheels and tires
General information
• When replacing tires, the tires with the
• Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's
most tread should be mounted on the rear
wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer
during hard braking.
• Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the
tires and/or wheels permanently.
braking properties and ability to force
aside rain, snow and slush.
WARNING
•
The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability
and handling requirements. Unapproved wheel/tire size combinations
can negatively affect your vehicle's stability and handling.
•
Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combinations will not be covered by your new
vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or
expenses that may result from such
installations.
• The tires with the most tread should always
be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skidding).
• Contact a Volvo workshop if you are
Summer and winter tires
unsure about the tread depth.
Storing wheels and tires
When storing complete wheels (tires mounted
on rims), they should be suspended off the
floor or placed on their sides on the floor.
Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on
their sides or standing upright, but should not
be suspended.
G021778
Tire wear
The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the
tire
• When switching between summer and
winter tires, mark the tires to indicate
where they were mounted on the car, e.g.,
LF = left front, RR = right rear
• Tires with tread designed to roll in only one
direction are marked with an arrow on the
sidewall.
CAUTION
Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,
dry, dark place, and should never be stored
in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils,
etc.
Tire rotation
Tire wear is affected by a number of factors
such as tire inflation, ambient temperature,
driving style, etc. Your vehicle is driven mainly
by the front tires, which will wear faster.
06
If the tires are rotated, they should only be
moved from front to back or vice versa. They
should never be rotated left to right/right to left.
However, tire rotation, done at the recommended intervals, is one way of helping to keep
tread wear as even as possible and will help
you get maximum mileage from your tires.
``
223
06 Wheels and tires
General information
Ideally, tire rotation should be done the first
time after approximately 3,000 miles
(5, 000 km) and thereafter at 6,000 mile
(10,000 km) intervals.
Tire rotation should only be performed if front/
rear tire wear is fairly even and tread height is
above 1/16" (1.6 mm).
When replacing worn tires, it is recommended
that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size
as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the
same make (manufacturer) will prevent alteration of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.
NOTE
Tire rotation is not included in regularly
scheduled maintenance and is performed
only at customer request, at additional
charge.
Your Volvo retailer can also provide guidance
based on your particular driving circumstances.
Tread wear indicator
G021829
06
224
The tires have wear indicator strips running
across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI
are printed on the side of the tire. When
approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the
tread, these strips become visible and indicate
that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less
than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor traction.
06 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation
Inflation placard
G032521
NOTE
Tire inflation placard
Tire inflation
Check tire inflation pressure regularly.
See the tire inflation tables beginning on page
227. A tire inflation pressure placard is also
located on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the
rear of the driver's door opening). This placard
indicates the designation of the factory-mounted tires on your vehicle, as well as load limits
and inflation pressure.
•
The placards shown indicate inflation
pressure for the tires installed on the
vehicle at the factory only.
•
A certain amount of air seepage from
the tires occurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuates with seasonal changes
in temperature. Always check tire pressure regularly.
• Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation
pressure, including the spare, at least once
a month and before long trips. You are
strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate.
• Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and
wear.
• Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
NOTE
A certain amount of air seepage from the
tires occurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuates with seasonal changes in temperature. Always check tire pressure regularly.
WARNING
•
Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failure and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread separation,
or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury.
•
Under-inflated tires reduce the load carrying capacity of your vehicle.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire
inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree
temperature drop causes a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check
your tire pressures frequently and adjust them
to the proper pressure, which can be found on
the vehicle's tire information placard or certification label.
Checking tire pressure
06
Cold tires
Inflation pressure should be checked when the
tires are cold.
The tires are considered to be cold when
they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air.
This temperature is normally reached after the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.
``
225
06 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation
After driving a distance of approximately
1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be
hot. If you have to drive farther than this distance to pump your tire(s), check and record
the tire pressure first and add the appropriate
air pressure when you get to the pump.
If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,
never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires
are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold
pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
6. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are
no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregularities.
NOTE
•
•
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the center
of the valve. Then recheck the pressure
with your tire gauge.
Some spare tires require higher inflation
pressure than the other tires. Consult
the tire inflation tables or see the inflation pressure placard.
To check inflation pressure:
06
1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,
then firmly press the tire gauge onto the
valve.
Tire ratings
2. Add air to reach the recommended air
pressure.
The speed ratings in the table translate as follow:
Speed ratings
3. Replace the valve cap.
4. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
5. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there
are no nails or other objects embedded
that could puncture the tire and cause an
air leak.
226
Speed ratings
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
Q
100 mph (160 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
Speed ratings
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
186 mph (300 km/h)
Load ratings
See page 229 for an explanation of the load
rating on the sidewall of the tire.
06 Wheels and tires
Inflation pressure—U.S. models
Tire inflation pressure table
The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard (see page 225 for its location) for information
specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory.
Tire size
225/50 R17
Cold tire pressure for up to 5 persons
Front
Rear
psi/kPa
psi/kPa
36/250
36/250
61/420
61/420
245/40 R18
Temporary spare tire
06
227
06 Wheels and tires
Inflation pressure—Canadian models
Tire inflation pressure table
The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard (see page 225 for its location) for information
specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory.
Tire size
225/50 R17
Cold tire pressure for up to 5 persons
Optional tire pressure for up to 3 persons
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
psi/kPa
psi/kPa
psi/kPa
psi/kPa
38/260
38/260
36/250
36/250
61/420
61/420
61/420
61/420
245/40 R18
Temporary spare tire
06
228
06 Wheels and tires
Tire designations
Information on the sidewall
5
6
7
9
1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The
larger the number, the wider the tire.
8
2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width
in percent.
4
3. R: Radial tire.
10
4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in
inches).
3
2
12
G010753
11
1
Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers
place standardized information on the sidewall
of all tires (see the illustration).
The following information is listed on the tire
sidewall:
5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a
load index of 95 equals a maximum load of
1521 lbs (690 kg).
6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum
speed at which the tire is designed to be
driven for extended periods of time, carrying a permissible load for the vehicle, and
with correct inflation pressure. For example, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
The tire designation:
NOTE
NOTE
Please be aware that the following tire designation is an example only and that this
particular tire may not be available on your
vehicle.
The tire's load index and speed rating may
not appear on the sidewall because they are
not required by law.
7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All
Terrain, AS = All Season
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"
and indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code
and the last four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built. For example, 1510 means that the tire was manufactured during week 15 of 2010. The numbers in between are marketing codes used
at the manufacturer's discretion. This information helps a tire manufacturer identify a
tire for safety recall purposes.
9. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies indicates or the number of layers of rubbercoated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate the
ply materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester, and
others.
06
10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum
load in pounds and kilograms that can be
carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire
information placard located on the B-Pillar
for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
``
229
06 Wheels and tires
Tire designations
11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature
grades: see page 234 for more information.
12. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This
limit is set by the tire manufacturer.
06
230
06 Wheels and tires
Glossary of tire terminology
Terms
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load,
radial tubeless, etc.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side
• Tire information placard: A placard
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next
showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire
sizes, recommended inflation pressure,
and the maximum weight the vehicle can
carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing
information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacturer.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load
at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tires load
carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier maximum
load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric
tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not increase the
tire's load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-
of the vehicle behind the front door.
to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this
chapter.
• Cold tires: The tires are considered to be
cold when they have the same temperature
as the surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.
bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when
mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or
a tire and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
• Maximum load rating: a figure indicating
the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. This
rating is established by the tire manufacturer.
06
• Maximum permissible inflation
pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This
limit is set by the tire manufacturer.
• Recommended tire inflation pressure:
inflation pressure, established by Volvo,
which is based on the type of tires that are
mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This
information can be found on the tire inflation placard(s) located on the driver's side
sure.
231
06 Wheels and tires
Vehicle loading
Loads
Permissible axle weight
Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance.
The maximum allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must
never exceed its maximum permissible weight.
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining your
vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a
trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire information placard:
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passengers.
Curb weight
The weight of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Capacity weight
06
All weight added to the curb weight, including
cargo and optional equipment. When towing,
trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo
weight.
NOTE
For trailer towing information, please refer to
the section "Towing a trailer" on page 216.
1
232
216.
NOTE
•
The location of the various labels in your
vehicle can be found on page 288.
•
A table listing important weight limits for
your vehicle can be found on page
291.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement "the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750
(5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual1 to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
06 Wheels and tires
Vehicle loading
WARNING
•
Exceeding the permissible axle weight,
gross vehicle weight, or any other
weight rating limits can cause tire overheating resulting in permanent deformation or catastrophic failure.
•
Do not use replacement tires with lower
load carrying capacities than the tires
that were original equipment on the
vehicle because this will lower the vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires with the
correct load carrying capacity. Consult
your Volvo retailer for information.
06
233
06 Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grading information
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST
CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE
GRADES
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between the tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is
not a measure of cornering (turning) traction.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straight-ahead) traction
tests and is not a measure of cornering
(turning) traction.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
06
TREADWEAR
TEMPERATURE
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and many depart significantly from the norm due to variation in driving
habits, maintenance practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a minimum level of performance that all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
TRACTION
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
234
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and tire failure.
06 Wheels and tires
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires
Winter driving conditions
Snow chains
Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with
the following restrictions:
• Snow chains should be installed on front
CAUTION
•
Check local regulations regarding the
use of snow chains before installing.
•
•
Use single-sided snow chains only.
wheels only. Use only Volvo approved
snow chains.
• If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires
and wheels are installed and are of a size
different than the original tires and wheels,
chains in some cases CANNOT be used.
Sufficient clearances between chains and
brakes, suspension and body components
must be maintained.
• Some strap-on type chains will interfere
with brake components and therefore
CANNOT be used.
• All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains
should only be installed on the front
wheels.
• Certain size tires may not allow the assembly of snow chains/traction devices.
Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow
chain information.
•
Always follow the chain manufacturer's
installation instructions carefully. Install
chains as tightly as possible and
retighten periodically.
Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed limit. (Under
no circumstances should you exceed
31 mph (50 km/h).
•
Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns
when driving with snow chains.
•
The handling of the vehicle can be
adversely affected when driving with
chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well
as locked wheel braking.
Snow tires, studded
tires1
cornering, braking, and accelerating. Failure to do so could reduce traction to an
unsafe level or adversely affect handling.
• Do not mix tires of different design as this
could also negatively affect overall tire road
grip.
• Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads
in warm weather. They should be removed
when the winter driving season has ended.
• Studded tires should be run-in
300 – 600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during
which the vehicle should be driven as
smoothly as possible to give the studs the
opportunity to seat properly in the tires.
The tires should have the same rotational
direction throughout their entire lifetime.
NOTE
Please consult state or provincial regulations restricting the use of studded winter
tires before installing such tires.
06
Tires for winter use:
• Owners who live in or regularly commute
through areas with sustained periods of
snow or icy driving conditions are strongly
advised to fit suitable winter tires to help
retain the highest degree of traction.
• It is important to install winter tires on all
four wheels to help retain traction during
1
Where permitted
235
06 Wheels and tires
Temporary Spare
Spare tire
The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a "Temporary Spare".
Recommended tire pressure (see the placard
on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should
be maintained irrespective of which position on
the vehicle the temporary spare tire is used on.
In the event of damage to this tire, a new one
can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.
WARNING
Current legislation prohibits the use of the
"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It
must be replaced as soon as possible by a
standard tire. Road holding and handling
may be affected with the "Temporary
Spare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h).
06
CAUTION
The vehicle must not be driven with wheels
of different dimensions or with a spare tire
other than the one that came with the vehicle. The use of different size wheels can
seriously damage your car's transmission.
1
236
Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.
06 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
Location
Accessing the tire sealing system
WARNING
The tire sealing system is stowed under the
floor of the trunk. To access it:
•
After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther than
approximately 120 miles (200 km).
•
Have the tire inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as
soon as possible to determine if it can
be permanently repaired or must be
replaced.
•
The vehicle should not be driven faster
than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire
that has been temporarily repaired with
the tire sealing system.
•
After using the tire sealing system, drive
carefully and avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers and sudden stops.
1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area.
2. Lift out the tire sealing system.
NOTE
•
Introduction
Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing
system* that enables you to temporarily seal a
hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire,
or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.
The tire sealing system is only intended
to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not
the sidewall.
•
Tires with large holes or tears cannot be
repaired with the tire sealing system.
•
After use, stow the tire sealing system
properly to help prevent rattling.
06
The system consists of an air compressor, a
container for the sealing compound, wiring to
connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical
system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a
hose used to connect the system to the tire’s
inflation valve.
The 12-volt sockets are located in the front
tunnel console and on the rear side of the center console in the rear seat, see page 198.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
237
06 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
Tire sealing system–overview
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tire sealing system:
•
The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in
the illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanol
and natural rubber-latex. These substances are harmful if swallowed.
•
The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes.
•
Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air.
If irritation persists, get medical attention.
Tire sealing system–temporarily
repairing a flat tire
Precautions:
On/Off switch
Electrical wire
Bottle holder (orange cover)
06
Protective hose cover
Air release knob
•
•
•
Keep out of reach of children.
•
Hands should be washed thoroughly
after handling.
Air pressure gauge
238
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin.
First aid:
•
Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention
if symptoms occur.
•
Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least
15 minutes, occasionally lifting the
upper and lower eyelids. Get medical
attention if symptoms occur.
Hose
Bottle with sealing compound
Do not ingest the contents.
G014338
Speed limit sticker
Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two
stages:
06 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
• Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping
sealing compound into the tire. The car is
then driven a short distance to distribute
the sealing compound in the tire.
NOTE
Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,
etc.) from the tire before using the sealing
system.
• Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is
checked and adjusted if necessary.
3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be
pressed down).
WARNING
Contact with the sealing compound may
cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash
the affected area immediately with soap and
water.
4. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle
holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle
of sealing compound.
WARNING
•
Never leave the tire sealing system
unattended when it is operating.
NOTE
•
Keep the tire sealing system away from
children.
Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
occurs automatically when the bottle is
screwed into the holder.
•
Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off
the road and away from moving traffic.
5. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.
•
Apply the parking brake.
Stage 1: Sealing the hole
1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit.
2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it
to the steering wheel hub where it will be
clearly visible to the driver.
6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve and screw the tire sealing system’s hose connector onto the valve as
tightly as possible by hand.
7. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.
8. Start the vehicle’s engine.
WARNING
The vehicle´s engine should be running
when the tire sealing system is used to avoid
battery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle
is parked in a well ventilated place, or outdoors, before using the system.
9. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor
by pressing the on/off switch to position I.
06
WARNING
The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep
it securely in place and help prevent sealing
compound leakage. Once in place, the bottle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done
by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
``
239
06 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
WARNING
•
Never stand next to the tire being inflated
when the compressor is in operation.
•
If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,
switch off the compressor immediately.
•
If there is visible damage to the sidewall
or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.
The vehicle should not be driven if this
occurs. Contact a towing service or
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if
applicable.
NOTE
06
The air pressure gauge will temporarily
show an increase in pressure to approximately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing compound is being pumped into the tire. The
pressure should return to a normal level
after approximately 30 seconds.
10. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to
between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch
off the compressor briefly to get a clear
reading from the pressure gauge.
240
CAUTION
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.
WARNING
If the pressure remains below 22 psi
(1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes,
turn off the compressor. In this case, the
hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle
should not be driven.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the
use of the sealing compound may lead to
incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare
cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor.
Use the tire sealing system to check and
adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure.
NOTE
•
Safely stow the tire sealing system in a
convenient place as it will soon be used
again to check the tire’s inflation pressure.
•
The empty bottle of sealing compound
cannot be removed from the bottle
holder. Consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician to have the
bottle removed and properly disposed
of.
11. Switch off the compressor and disconnect
the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.
12. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.
13. Immediately drive the vehicle for approximately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the sealing compound in the tire.
06 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
WARNING
If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering
behavior, or noises should occur while driving, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a
safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps,
cracks, or other visible damage, and
recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure
is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue
driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure
1. Connect the tire sealing system as described in stage 1.
2. Refer to the inflation pressure tablesfor the
correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs
to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s
compressor. If necessary, release air from
the tire by turning the air release knob
counterclockwise.
CAUTION
Replacing the sealing compound
container
The sealing compound container must be
replaced if:
• the tire sealing system has been used to
repair a tire
• the container’s expiration date has passed
Inflating tires
The tire sealing system can be used to inflate
the tires. To do so:
1. Park the car in a safe place.
2. The compressor should be switched off.
Ensure that the on/off switch is in position
0 (the 0 side of the switch should be
pressed down).
(see the date on decal).
NOTE
3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.
•
After use, the sealing compound bottle,
the hose, and certain other system
components must be replaced. Please
consult your Volvo retailer for replacement parts.
4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve and screw the hose connector
onto the valve as tightly as possible by
hand.
•
If the sealing compound bottle’s expiration date has passed, please take it to
a Volvo retailer or a recycling station
that can properly dispose of harmful
substances.
6. Start the vehicle’s engine.
5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.
06
WARNING
•
The vehicle’s engine should be running
when the tire sealing system is used to
avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure
the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated
place, or outdoors, before using the system.
•
Children should never be left unattended
in the vehicle when the engine is running.
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.
WARNING
If you interrupt your trip for more than 1
hour, check the inflation pressure in the
damaged tire again before continuing.
``
241
06 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the
gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to
get a clear reading from the pressure
gauge.
8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs to
be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s
compressor (press the on/off switch to
position I). If necessary, release air from the
tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise.
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.
06
9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off
switch to position 0) when the correct inflation pressure has been reached.
10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.
11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the
12-volt socket.
242
06 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
Removing a wheel
WARNING
Current legislation prohibits the use of the
“Temporary Spare” tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It
must be replaced as soon as possible by a
standard tire. Road holding and handling
may be affected with the “Temporary
Spare” in use.
G014341
CAUTION
The vehicle must never be driven with more
than one temporary spare wheel.
Location of jack and tools
Spare wheel
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for temporary use. Replace the spare
wheel with a normal wheel as soon as possible.
The car's handling may be altered by the use
of the spare wheel. The correct tire pressure for
the spare wheel is stated in the tire pressure
tables beginning on page 227.
The spare wheel is only intended for temporary
use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as
possible. The car's handling may be altered by
the use of the spare wheel. The correct tire
pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tire
pressure tables beginning on page 227.
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
well with the rim side down. There are two foam
blocks, one under the spare wheel and one
over/inside. The upper one contains all tools.
The same bolt runs through to secure the spare
wheel and the foam blocks.
Taking out the spare wheel
1. Open the floor hatch.
2. Undo the retaining bolt.
3. Lift out the foam block with tools.
2. Lift the bag out of the vehicle and remove
the spare wheel from the bag.
3.
4. Remove the jack and tools from the foam
block and change the wheels (see the
instructions in the following section
"Changing a wheel").
5. After changing wheels, return the jack and
tools to the foam block and close the floor
hatch.
6. If possible, place the wheel with the punctured tire in the bag.
7.
The other two blocks can remain in the spare
wheel well.
WARNING
06
After use
The foam block and spare wheel must be
replaced in the reverse order. Note the arrow
on the upper foam block. It should point forward.
4. Lift out the spare wheel.
1. Release the bag's retaining straps.
``
243
06 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
Changing a wheel
G017465
WARNING
Removing the wheel cover
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Put the gear selector in P.
3. Block the wheels that are on the ground
with wooden blocks or large stones.
06
4. Remove the wheel cover (where applicable) using the lug wrench in the tool bag.
With the vehicle still on the ground, use the
lug wrench to loosen the wheel nuts
½ – 1 turns by exerting downward pressure.
5. Turn the nuts counterclockwise to loosen.
6. There are two jack attachment points on
each side of the vehicle. Position the jack
correctly in the attachment (see illustration
above) and crank while simultaneously
guiding the base of the jack to the ground.
The base of the jack must be flat on a level,
firm, non-slippery surface. Before raising
the vehicle, check that the jack is still correctly positioned in the attachment.
7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be
changed is lifted off the ground.
8. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and
carefully remove the wheel so as not to
damage the threads on the studs.
•
The jack must correctly engage the jack
attachment.
•
Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, nonslippery surface.
•
Never allow any part of your body to be
extended under a vehicle supported by
a jack.
•
Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other job,
use stands to support the vehicle.
•
Apply the parking brake and put the
gear selector in the Park (P) position.
•
Block the wheels standing on the
ground, use rigid wooden blocks or
large stones.
•
The jack should be kept well-greased
and clean, and should not be damaged.
•
No objects should be placed between
the base of jack and the ground, or
between the jack and the attachment
bar on the vehicle.
Re-installing the wheel
1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel
and hub.
2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.
244
06 Wheels and tires
G022916
Changing a wheel
Tighten the lug nuts
3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten handtight. Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until all nuts are snug.
4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alternately tighten the bolts crosswise to
103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm).
06
5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable).
245
06 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Introduction
NOTE
USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The tire pressure monitoring system1 uses sensors mounted in the tire valves to check inflation pressure levels. When the vehicle is moving at a speed of approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit
inflation pressure data to a receiver located in
the vehicle.
06
When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS
will light up the tire pressure warning light
) (also referred to as a telltale) in the
(
instrument panel and will display one of the
following messages in the text window: Tire
pressure low or Tire needs air now.
1
246
NOTE
If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute and Tire press. syst Service
required will be displayed.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
This system is standard on U.S. models and optional on Canadian models
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
06 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
NOTE
TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does
not replace normal tire maintenance. For
information on correct tire pressure, please
refer to the Tire inflation pressure tables or
consult your Volvo retailer.
Changing wheels with TPMS
Please note the following when changing or
replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/
tires on the vehicle:
• Only the factory-mounted wheels are
CAUTION
When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press
the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the
valve to help avoid bending or otherwise
damaging the valve.
equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary
Erasing warning messages
When a low tire pressure warning message has
been displayed, and the tire pressure warning
light has come on:
1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the
inflation pressure of all four tires.
2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure
(consult the tire pressure placard or the
inflation pressure tables beginning on page
227.
3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to
drive the vehicle for several minutes at a
speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This
will erase the warning text and the warning
light will go out.
WARNING
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire
failure, resulting in a loss of control of the
vehicle.
spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS
sensor.
NOTE
•
If you change to tires with a different
recommended inflation pressure, the
TPMS system must be recalibrated to
these tires. On U.S. models, this must
be done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician. On Canadian models, see the following section "Recalibrating TPMS."
•
If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sensor is moved to another wheel, the sensor's seal, nut, and valve core should be
replaced.
•
When installing TPMS sensors, the
vehicle must be parked for at least
15 minutes with the ignition off. If the
vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a
TPMS error message will be displayed.
• If wheels without TPMS sensors are mounted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST
SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed
each time the vehicle is driven above
25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.
• Once TPMS sensors are properly installed,
the warning message should not reappear.
If the message is still displayed, drive the
vehicle for several minutes at a speed of
20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the
message.
• Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be
fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle.
Volvo does not recommend moving sensors back and forth between sets of
wheels.
06
Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models
only)
In certain cases, it may be necessary to recalibrate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recommended tire inflation pressures (see the infla``
247
06 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
tion pressure table on page 228), for example,
if higher inflation pressure is necessary when
transporting heavy loads, etc.
This is done in the vehicle's menu system (see
page 122).
To recalibrate:
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure and
put the ignition in mode I or II (see page
78 for additional information).
3. In the menu system, select Car settings
Tire pressure and press ENTER.
4. Select Calibrate tire pressure and press
ENTER.
06
5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above
25 mph (40 km/h) continuously for at least
1 minute.
> This recalibrates TPMS to the new inflation pressure.
Activating/deactivating TPMS (Canadian
models only)
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see page
78 for additional information).
3. In the menu system, select Car settings
Tire pressure and press ENTER.
248
4. Select Tire pressure system and press
ENTER.
> An X is displayed if the system is activated and disappears when the system
is deactivated.
06 Wheels and tires
06
249
Volvo maintenance................................................................................
Maintaining your car.............................................................................
Hood and engine compartment............................................................
Engine oil...............................................................................................
Fluids.....................................................................................................
Replacing bulbs....................................................................................
Wiper blades and washer fluid..............................................................
Battery...................................................................................................
Fuses.....................................................................................................
Vehicle care...........................................................................................
250
252
253
255
256
258
260
267
269
272
281
MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS
07 Maintenance and specifications
Volvo maintenance
Introduction
Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance
program outlined in the Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet. This maintenance program contains inspections and services necessary for the proper function of your
vehicle. The maintenance services contain
several checks that require special tools and
training, and therefore must be performed by a
qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top
condition, specify time-tested and proven
Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories.
The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S
The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle
manufacturers to furnish written instructions to
the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper
servicing and function of the components that
control emissions. These services, which are
listed in the "Warranty and Service Records
Information" booklet, are not covered by the
warranty. You will be required to pay for labor
and material used.
07
Maintenance
Your Volvo passed several major inspections
before it was delivered to you, in accordance
with Volvo specifications. The maintenance
procedures outlined in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, many of
which will positively affect your vehicle's emissions, should be performed as indicated. It is
252
recommended that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be retained in case questions arise concerning maintenance. Inspection and maintenance should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or
suspected.
Applicable warranties – U.S/Canada
In accordance with applicable U.S. and Canadian regulations, the following list of warranties
is provided.
•
•
•
•
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty
Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Systems Limited Warranty
• Emission Design and Defect Warranty
• Emission Performance Warranty
These are the federal warranties; other warranties are provided as required by state/provincial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and
Service Records Information booklet for
detailed information concerning each of the
warranties.
Periodic maintenance helps minimize
emissions
Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehicle running well. Your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet provides a com-
prehensive periodic maintenance schedule up
to 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle maintenance. The schedule includes components
that affect vehicle emissions. This page
describes some of the emission-related components.
07 Maintenance and specifications
Maintaining your car
Owner maintenance
As needed:
Periodic maintenance requirements and intervals are described in your vehicle's Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet.
Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to
reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup
of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt
residues.
The following points can be carried out
between the normally scheduled maintenance
services.
Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at
the base of the windshield, and from other places where they may collect.
Each time the car is refueled:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,
headlights, and tail lights.
Monthly:
NOTE
Complete service information for qualified
technicians is available online for purchase
or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.
• Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect
the tires for wear.
Hoisting the vehicle
• Check that engine coolant and other fluid
They are specially reinforced to bear the weight
of the vehicle. A garage jack can also be placed
under the front of the engine support frame.
Take care not to damage the splash guard
under the engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it.
Always use axle stands or similar structures.
If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, the
front and rear lift arm pads should be centered
under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard
edge of the sill rail (see illustration).
Emission inspection readiness
What is an Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II)?
OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized
engine management system. It stores diagnostic information about your vehicle's emission
controls. It can light the Check Engine light
(MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A
"fault" is a component or system that is not
performing within an expected range. A fault
may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will
store a message about any fault.
levels are between the indicated "min" and
"max" markings.
• Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
cleaner and soft paper towels.
• Wipe driver information displays with a soft
cloth.
• Visually inspect battery terminals for corrosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal connector, or a battery near the end
of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo
retailer for additional information.
07
How do states use OBD II for emission
inspections?
If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the
two jack attachments points should be used.
Many states connect a computer directly to a
vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can
then read "faults." In some states, this type of
``
253
07 Maintenance and specifications
Maintaining your car
inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission
test.
How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission
inspection?
Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspection for any of the following reasons.
• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your
vehicle may fail inspection.
• If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,
but went out without any action on your
part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.
Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending
on the inspection practices in your area.
• If you had recent service that required disconnecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic
information may be incomplete and "not
ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not
ready may fail inspection.
How can I prepare for my next OBD II
emission inspection?
• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or
07
was lit but went out without service, have
your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,
serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.
• If you recently had service for a lit Check
Engine light, or if you had service that
required disconnecting the battery, a
period of driving is necessary to bring the
OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A
half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high-
254
way driving is typically needed to allow
OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo
retailer can provide you with more information on planning a trip.
• Maintain your vehicle in accordance with
your vehicle's maintenance schedule.
07 Maintenance and specifications
Hood and engine compartment
Engine compartment, overview
Opening and closing the hood
WARNING
The cooling fan may start or continue to
operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine
has been switched off.
WARNING
G018945
The ignition should always be completely
switched off before performing any operations in the engine compartment.
The appearance of the engine compartment
may vary depending on engine model.
G010951
Coolant expansion tank
Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine oil dipstick
Pull the lever located under the left side of
the dash to release the hood lock.
Lift the hood slightly. Press the release
control (located under the right front edge
of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood
The distributor ignition system operates at
very high voltages. Special safety precautions must be followed to prevent injury.
Always turn the ignition off when:
•
Replacing distributor ignition components e.g. plugs, coil, etc.
•
Do not touch any part of the distributor
ignition system while the engine is running. This may result in unintended
movements and body injury.
Radiator
Filler cap for engine oil
Cover over brake fluid reservoir
07
Battery
WARNING
Check that the hood locks properly when
closed.
Relay and fuse box
Washer fluid reservoir
Air cleaner
255
07 Maintenance and specifications
Engine oil
Checking the engine oil
Checking and adding oil
The oil level should be checked at regular intervals, particularly during the period up to the
first scheduled maintenance service.
• See page 295 for oil specifications.
• Refer to the Warranty and Service Records
Information booklet for information on the
oil change intervals.
CAUTION
•
256
Location of the filler cap and dipstick
Oil that is lower than the specified quality can damage the engine.
•
Volvo does not recommend the use of
oil additives.
•
The car should be parked on a level surface.
•
Always add oil of the same type and
viscosity as already used.
•
If the engine is warm, wait for at least
10 – 15 minutes after the engine has
been switched off.
Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This
could cause an increase in oil consumption.
The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick
Checking the oil
NOTE
•
•
07
Not checking the oil level regularly can
result in serious engine damage if the oil
level becomes too low.
G021737
G021734
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
Before checking the oil:
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lintfree rag.
2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check
the oil level. The level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks.
3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to
the MIN mark, add approximately
0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil.
4. Recheck the level and add more oil if necessary until the level is near the MAX mark.
07 Maintenance and specifications
Engine oil
WARNING
Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into
contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.
NOTE
Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is
changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo
retailer.
07
257
07 Maintenance and specifications
Fluids
Coolant
Location of the coolant reservoir
CAUTION
•
If necessary, top up the cooling system
with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze
only (a 50/50 mix of water and antifreeze).
•
Different types of antifreeze/coolant
may not be mixed.
•
If the cooling system is drained, it
should be flushed with clean water or
premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled
with the correct mixture of water/antifreeze.
•
The cooling system must always be
kept filled to the correct level, and the
level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there
can be high local temperatures in the
engine which could result in damage.
Check coolant regularly!
•
Do not top up with water only. This
reduces the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the coolant and has a
lower boiling point. It can also cause
damage to the cooling system if it
should freeze.
Normally, the coolant does not need to be
changed. If the system must be drained, consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
See page 296 for information on cooling system capacities.
07
•
258
Do not use chlorinated tap water in the
vehicle's cooling system.
WARNING
•
Never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is warm. Wait until the vehicle
cools.
•
If it is necessary to top off the coolant
when the engine is warm, unscrew the
expansion tank cap slowly so that the
overpressure dissipates.
Brake fluid
Location of the brake fluid reservoir
Checking the level
The fluid reservoir is concealed under the
round cover at the rear of the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed first
before the reservoir cap can be accessed.
07 Maintenance and specifications
Fluids
The brake fluid should always be between the
MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the reservoir. Check, without removing the cap, that
there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.
2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.
The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks.
Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F
(>280 °C), P/N 9437433
Power steering fluid
Replace: The fluid should be replaced according to the intervals specified in the Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet.
WARNING
If a problem should occur in the power
steering system or if the vehicle has no electrical current and must be towed, it is still
possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep
in mind that greater effort will be required to
turn the steering wheel.
CAUTION
Keep the area around the power steering
fluid reservoir clean when checking.
When driving under extremely hard conditions
(mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to
replace the fluid more often. Consult a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
Always entrust brake fluid changing to a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
WARNING
•
•
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark
in the reservoir or if a brake-related
message is shown in the information
display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician and have the brake
system inspected.
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
require changing. The fluid level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks. For capacities and recommended fluid grade, see
page 296.
07
Dot 4+ should never be mixed with any
other type of brake fluid.
Filling
1. Turn and open the cover.
259
07 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
Introduction
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WARNING
•
Active Bending Lights* – due to the high
voltage used by these headlights, these
bulbs should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
•
Turn off the lights and remove the
remote key from the ignition before
changing any bulbs.
Dome lighting
Reading lights
Glove compartment lighting
Footwell lighting
G010325
All bulb specifications are listed on page 265.
The following bulbs should only be replaced by
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician:
WARNING
Turn signals in the door mirrors
Approach lighting in the door mirrors
Headlight housing
•
The engine should not be running when
changing bulbs.
•
If the engine has been running just prior
to replacing bulbs in the headlight housing, please keep in mind that components in the engine compartment will be
hot.
Brake lights
Active Bending Lights and LED bulbs
NOTE
For information regarding any other bulbs
not mentioned in this section, please contact your Volvo retailer or a trained and
authorized Volvo service technician.
The entire headlight housing must be lifted out
when replacing all front bulbs.
CAUTION
07
Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers
vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit
on the reflector, which will damage it.
260
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
•
Always switch off the ignition before
starting to replace a bulb.
•
The optional Active Bending Light bulbs
contain trace amounts of mercury.
These bulbs should always be disposed
of by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Removing the headlight housing
1. Switch off the ignition by briefly pressing
the START/STOP ENGINE button and
remove the remote key from the ignition
slot1.
2. (Upper illustration under "Headlight housing")
Withdraw the headlight housing's locking pins.
Pull the headlight housing straight out.
CAUTION
When disconnecting the connector, pull on
the connector itself and not on the wiring.
Unplug the wiring connector by holding
down the clip with your thumb.
Removing the cover to access the
bulbs
Pull out the connector with the other
hand.
4. Lift out the housing and place it on a soft
surface to avoid scratching the lens.
5. Replace the defective bulb(s).
Reinserting the headlight housing
1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into
place.
2. Reinstall the headlight housing and locking
pins. Check that they are correctly
inserted. The headlight housing must be
properly inserted and secured in place
before the lighting is switched on or the
remote key is inserted into the ignition slot.
G021745
NOTE
NOTE
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 260.
3. Check that the lights function properly.
1. Open the retaining clamp by pressing it to
the side.
2. Press down the clips on the upper edge of
the cover and remove it.
07
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order.
3. (Lower illustration under "Headlight housing")
1
Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.
``
261
07 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
G021748
1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see page 260).
1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see page 260).
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see
page 261).
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see
page 261).
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see
page 261).
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
3. Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out.
3. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder
downward.
4. Remove the connector from the bulb.
4. Remove the connector from the bulb.
5. Press the new bulb into the socket and turn
it clockwise to put it in place. It can only be
secured in one position.
5. Insert a new bulb in the connector until it
snaps in place. It can only be inserted in
one way.
6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight
housing.
6. Return the bulb holder into position in the
headlight housing.
7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.
7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
6. Press the new bulb into the socket until it
snaps into place. It can only be secured in
one position.
7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.
2
262
G021747
1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see page 260).
4. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder
downward.
07
Extra high beam2
High beam, Halogen
G021746
Low beam, Halogen
Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.
07 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
Turn signals
Parking lights
Side marker lights
NOTE
1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see page 260).
1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see page 260).
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see
page 261).
2. Remove the round cover by pulling the tab
until the cover comes off.
3. To access the bulb, first remove the high
beam bulb.
3. Pull out the holder to access the bulb.
4. Pull the wire to withdraw the bulb holder.
5. Remove the burned out bulb and install a
new one. It can only be secured in one
position.
6. Press the bulb holder into the socket and
press until it clicks into place.
7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.
4. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it
in slightly and turning out before pulling it
out. Press a new bulb into the socket.
5. Press the bulb holder into the socket and
press until it clicks into place.
6. Press the cover until it clicks into position.
7. Reinstall the headlight housing.
G021751
G021750
G021749
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 260.
1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see page 260).
2. Remove the round cover.
3. Pull the wire to withdraw the bulb holder.
07
4. Pull out the burned out bulb and install a
new one. It can only be secured in one
position.
5. Press the bulb holder into the socket and
press until it clicks into place.
6. Press the cover until it clicks into position.
``
263
07 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
Front fog lights
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
NOTE
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 260.
4. Install a new bulb by turning clockwise.
5. Press the bulb into the holder. (The profile
of the bulb holder corresponds to the profile of the foot of the bulb.)
6. Reinstall the bulb holder. The TOP mark on
the bulb holder must always be upward.
G021753
7. Put the cover back into place.
1. Remove the covers in the left/right panel to
access the bulbs. The bulbs are located in
separate bulb holders.
2. Press the catches together and pull out the
bulb holder.
3. Remove the defective bulb by pressing it in
slightly and turning it before pulling it out.
Taillight housing
4. Plug in the connector.
5. Press the bulb holder until it clicks into
place and reinstall the cover.
G021754
License plate lighting
1. Remove the cover by pressing in the clips
and pulling straight out.
2. Unscrew the fog light housing screw and
pull it out.
264
The bulbs in the taillight cluster are replaced
from inside the trunk (not the LED functions).
G021756
07
07 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing
and pull it out.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and
tighten the screws.
Trunk lighting
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that
the bulb housing comes loose.
3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire
mirror glass and cover.
4. Replace the bulb.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
it back into the bulb housing.
Reinstalling the mirror glass
Vanity mirror lighting
2. Press the three lower lugs back into position.
1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mirror glass back into position.
Removing the mirror glass
NOTE
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 260.
The trunk lighting is located on opposite sides
of the trunk.
G021759
G021758
Bulb specifications
1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower
edge, in the center, turn and carefully pry
up the lug on the edge.
2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge
on the left and right sides (by the black
rubber sections), and pry carefully so that
the glass comes loose in the lower edge.
Lighting
function
Wattage
Bulb
Active Bending Lights
(extra high
beam)
55
H7
Low beam
(halogen)
55
H7
High beam
(halogen)
65
H9
Rear fog light
21
P21W
Brake lights
21
P21W
Backup lights
21
P21W
07
``
265
07 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
07
266
Lighting
function
Wattage
Bulb
Rear turn signals
21
PY21W
Front turn signals
21
H21W
Front fog
lights
35
H8
Trunk lighting,
license plate
lighting
5
Festoon
bulb
SV5.5
Vanity mirror
1.2
Festoon
bulb
SV5.5
Front parking
lights
5
W5W
Front side
marker lights
5
W5W
Glove compartment
lighting
5
Festoon
bulb
SV8.5
07 Maintenance and specifications
Wiper blades and washer fluid
Wiper blades
The windshield wiper blades are different
lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is longer
than the one on the passenger side.
Service position
Replacing the windshield wiper blades
Wiper blades in service position
The wiper blades must be in the service (vertical) position for replacement or washing. To
put them in this position:
1. Switch off the ignition (ignition mode 0, see
page 78) and keep the remote key in the
ignition slot1.
2. Move the right steering wheel lever up and
hold it for at least 1 second. The wipers will
then move to the vertical position on the
windshield.
07
The wipers will return to the normal position
when the vehicle is started.
1
Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.
``
267
07 Maintenance and specifications
Wiper blades and washer fluid
With the wipers in the service position, fold
out the wiper arm from the windshield.
Press the button on the wiper blade attachment and pull the wiper blade straight out,
parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks
into place.
Check that the blade is securely in place.
Cleaning
Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean
helps improve visibility and prolongs the service life of the wiper blades. Clean the wiper
blades with a stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm
soap solution or car washing detergent.
Filling washer fluid
G021764
07
Location of the washer fluid reservoir
268
The windshield and headlight washers share a
common reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir is located on the
driver's side of the engine compartment. During cold weather, the reservoir should be filled
with windshield washer solvent containing
antifreeze. For capacities, see page 296.
07 Maintenance and specifications
Battery
Warning symbols on the battery
Wear protective goggles.
NOTE
A used battery should be disposed of in an
environmentally responsible manner. Consult your Volvo retailer or take the battery to
a recycling station.
Keep away from children.
Handling
• Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and tightened.
Avoid smoking, open flames,
and/or sparks.
• Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running (for example, when
replacing the battery).
• If the battery is fully discharged a number
of times, this may shorten its service life.
See the owner's manual.
• Because the battery’s starting capacity
decreases with time, it may be necessary
to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for
an extended period of time or if the vehicle
is usually only driven short distances.
Risk of explosion
•
Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.
•
•
Do not smoke near the battery.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medical
help immediately if eyes are affected.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
• The service life of a battery is affected by
factors such as driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold may also further
decrease the battery’s starting capacity.
Contains corrosive acid.
WARNING
Never use a quick charger to charge the battery.
Maintenance
• Use a screw driver to open the caps or
cover and a flashlight to inspect the level.
• If necessary, add distilled water. The level
should never be above the indicator.
• The fluid level should be checked if the
battery has been recharged.
07
• After inspection, be sure the cap over each
battery cell or the cover is securely in
place.
• Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and properly tightened.
``
269
07 Maintenance and specifications
Battery
• Never disconnect the battery when the
Changing
engine is running, or when the key is in the
ignition. This could damage the vehicle's
electrical system.
• The battery should be disconnected from
the vehicle when a battery charger is used
directly on the battery.
• To help keep the battery in good condition,
the vehicle should be driven for at least 15
minutes a week or connected to a charger
with an automatic charging function.
• If the battery is fully discharged a number
of times, this may shorten its service life.
Keeping the battery fully charged helps
prolong its service life.
• The service life of a battery is affected by
factors such as driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold may also further
decrease the battery’s starting capacity.
• Because the battery’s starting capacity
decreases with time, it may be necessary
to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for
an extended period of time or if the vehicle
is usually only driven short distances.
07
Connect and disconnect the positive and
negative cables in the correct sequence.
Removal
•
CAUTION
270
WARNING
•
Always use distilled or deionized water
(battery water).
•
Never fill above the level mark in the cell.
Switch off the ignition and wait at least
5 minutes before disconnecting the battery so
07 Maintenance and specifications
Battery
that all information in the vehicle's electrical
system can be stored in the control modules.
Open the clips on the front cover and
remove the cover.
Release the rubber moulding so that the
rear cover is free.
Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.
Detach the black negative cable.
Detach the red positive cable
Detach the ventilation hose from the
battery
Loosen the screw holding the battery
clamp.
Move the battery to the side and lift it up.
2. Move the battery inward and to the side
until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
3. Screw in the battery with the screw in the
clamp.
4. Connect the ventilation hose.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the state of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
8. Reinstall the cold section moulding. (See
Removal).
9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with
the clips. (See Removal).
07
Installation
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.
271
07 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Replacing fuses
Location of the fuse boxes
There are relay/fuse boxes located in the
engine compartment, the passenger compartment, and the trunk.
If an electrical component fails to function, this
may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way
to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it.
To do so:
1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult
to remove, a special fuse removal tool is
located on the inside of the engine compartment fuse box cover.
2. From the side, examine the curved metal
wire in the fuse to see if it is intact.
If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the
same color and amperage (written on the fuse).
If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical
system inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
WARNING
07
272
Never use metal objects or fuses with higher
amperage than those stated on the following pages. Doing so could seriously damage
or overload the vehicle's electrical system.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Under the glove compartment
Under the glove compartment
On the outboard side of the dashboard
(S80 Executive* only)
Trunk
Engine compartment
07 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Engine compartment
07
``
273
07 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Engine compartment, upper
Engine compartment, front
Function
A
Function
A
Circuit breaker
60
Engine Control Module (ECM),
transmission, SRS
10
Heated washer nozzles*
10
Vacuum pump I5T
5
Lighting panel
5
Engine compartment, lower
–
Positions
These fuses are all located in the engine compartment box. Fuses in
are located under
.
•
•
Headlight washers*
20
Windshield wipers
30
-
NOTE
•
–
–
Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be
changed at any time when necessary.
Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/
circuit breakers and should only be
removed or replaced by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
There is a special fuse removal tool on
the underside of the cover.
Climate system blower
40
-
–
40
Relay - engine compartment
box
5
ABS pump
ABS valves
20
Auxiliary lights*
20
Horn
15
–
07
274
Function
A
Engine Control Module (ECM)
10
50
Active Bending Lights-headlight leveling*
10
Circuit breaker
Circuit breaker
50
20
Control module - automatic
transmission
15
Central electrical module
Circuit breaker
60
ABS 15 feed
5
A/C compressor
15
Circuit breaker
60
Speed-dependent steering
force*
5
Relay-coils
5
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Function
A
Starter motor relay
30
Ignition coils
20
Engine Control Module (ECM),
throttle
10
Injection system, Mass air
meter (ECM)
15
Engine valves
10
EVAP/heated oxygen sensor/
fuel injection
15
Fuel leakage detection
5
–
Cooling fan
80
Electro-hydraulic power steering
10
0
07
``
275
07 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Under the glove compartment
Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse
boxes.
Po
s
1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up.
Function
A
-
2. The fuses are accessible.
Po
s
Function
A
Circuit breaker - audio system,
subwoofer*
40
-
-
276
Function
A
Controls in front passenger's
door
20
Controls in right rear passenger's door
20
Controls in left rear passenger's door
20
Keyless drive*
20
Power driver's seat*
20
-
Positions-fuse box A
07
Po
s
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
12-volt socket (trunk)
15
Controls in driver's door
20
07 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Po
s
Function
A
Power front passenger's seat*
20
Folding rear seat head
restraints
15
Po
s
Audio system, Navigation system display*
10
Audio system
15
Bluetooth hands-free system
5
Power moonroof*
5
Courtesy lighting, climate system sensor
Function
A
Pos
Function
A
Electric sun curtain*, S80
Executive only: Front seat
massage and armrest lighting,
refrigerator*
10
Instrument panel information display
5
Adaptive cruise control/
collision warning*
10
Heated rear passenger's seat
(right)*
15
Courtesy lighting, rain sensor*
7.5
Heated rear passenger's seat
(left)*
15
Steering wheel module
7.5
5
Rear cental locking and
fuel filler door
10
Park assist*, Volvo Navigation
System*, Park assist camera*
Washers
15
All Wheel Drive* control module
5
Windshield washer
15
Active chassis system*
10
Trunk unlock
10
Trunk lock
10
Fuel pump
20
Remote key receiver,
Alarm, Climate system
5
Steering wheel lock
15
Alarm, On-board diagnostic system
5
Positions-fuse box B
12-volt sockets
15
Heated front passenger's
seat*
15
Heated driver's seat*
15
Pos
Function
A
Front courtesy lighting,
power seat(s)*
07
7.5
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
277
07 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Pos
Function
A
Airbag system, Occupant
weight system
10
Adaptive cruise control
front radar*
5
Accelerator pedal, power
door mirrors, Heated rear
seats*
7.5
Audio system, CD and
radio
15
Brake lights
5
Power moonroof*
20
Immobilizer
5
07
278
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Far right edge of the dashboard (S80 Executive only)
NOTE
If the fuse listed below needs to be
replaced, please consult a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
Pos
Function
Analogue clock
A
5
07
``
279
07 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Cargo area
Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area
Positions
07
Rear fuse box
Rear fuse box
A
Electric parking brake (left
side)
30
Electric parking brake (right
side)
30
Heated rear window
30
Trailer socket 2*
15
-
280
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Rear fuse box
A
Trailer socket 1*
40
-
-
07 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care
considerably and also helps prolong the
service life of the wiper blades.
Washing the car
The following points should be kept in mind
when washing and cleaning the car:
• The car should be washed at regular intervals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots
adhere to the paint and may cause damage. To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly important to wash the car frequently
in the wintertime.
• Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.
Doing so may cause detergents and wax
to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid
scratching, use lukewarm water to soften
the dirt before you wash with a soft
sponge, and plenty of sudsy water.
• Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel
• A detergent can be used to facilitate the
softening of dirt and oil.
• Dry the car with a clean chamois and
remember to clean the drain holes in the
doors and rocker panels.
• Tar spots can be removed with tar remover
after the car has been washed.
• A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy
water can be used to clean the wiper
blades. Frequent cleaning of the windshield and wiper blades improves visibility
•
During high pressure washing, the
spray mouthpiece must never be closer
to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not
spray into the locks.
•
Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can
reduce lighting capacity considerably.
Clean the headlights regularly, for
example when refueling.
housings, fenders, etc).
• In areas of high industrial fallout, more frequent washing is recommended.
NOTE
When washing the car, remember to remove
dirt from the drain holes in the doors and
sills.
Special moonroof cautions:
•
Always close the moonroof and sun
shade before washing your vehicle.
CAUTION
•
•
Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rubber components
Never use abrasive cleaning agents on
the moonroof.
•
•
Polishing chromed strips can wear
away or damage the surface
Never use wax on the rubber seals
around the moonroof.
•
Polishes containing abrasive substances should not be used
• Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork
as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish
may be permanently damaged.
CAUTION
Exterior components
Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning
products, available at your Volvo retailer, for
cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental
components such as chromed strips on the
exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for
using these products should be followed carefully. Solvents or stain removers should not be
used.
07
``
281
07 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care
CAUTION
•
Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rubber components
•
Polishing chromed strips can wear
away or damage the surface
•
Polishes containing abrasive substances should not be used
Automatic car wash
• We do NOT recommend washing your car
CAUTION
•
Before driving into an automatic car
wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to
avoid damaging the windshield wipers.
•
Make sure that side view mirrors, auxiliary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any
antenna(s) are retracted or removed.
Otherwise there is risk of the machine
dislodging them.
•
in an automatic wash during the first few
months (because the paint will not have
hardened sufficiently).
• An automatic wash is a simple and quick
way to clean your car, but it is worth
remembering that it may not be as thorough as when you yourself go over the car
with sponge and water. Keeping the underbody clean is most important, especially in
the winter. Some automatic washers do
not have facilities for washing the underbody.
07
Chromed wheels: Clean chromeplated wheels using the same detergents used for the body of the vehicle.
Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can
permanently stain chrome-plated
wheels.
WARNING
•
•
When the vehicle is driven immediately
after being washed, apply the brakes,
including the parking brake, several
times in order to remove any moisture
from the brake linings.
Engine cleaning agents should not be
used when the engine is warm. This
constitutes a fire risk.
Exterior lighting
Condensation may form temporarily on the
inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as
headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor-
282
mal and the lights are designed to withstand
moisture. Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been on for a short
time.
Polishing and waxing
• Normally, polishing is not required during
the first year after delivery, however, waxing may be beneficial.
• Before applying polish or wax the vehicle
must be washed and dried. Tar spots can
be removed with kerosene or tar remover.
Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing
compound.
• After polishing use liquid or paste wax.
• Several commercially available products
contain both polish and wax.
• Waxing alone does not substitute for polishing a dull surface.
• A wide range of polymer-based waxes can
be purchased today. These waxes are easy
to use and produce a long-lasting, highgloss finish that protects the bodywork
against oxidation, road dirt and fading.
• Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct
sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should
not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).
07 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care
CAUTION
Volvo does not recommend the use of longlife or durable paint protection coatings,
some of which may claim to prevent pitting,
fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have
not been tested by Volvo for compatibility
with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them
may cause the clear coat to soften, crack,
or cloud. Damage caused by application of
paint protection coatings may not be covered under your vehicle's paint warranty.
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.
Upholstery care
Fabric
Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For
more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,
shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric
stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.
AlcanteraTM suede-like material
Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a
soft cloth and mild soap solution.
Leather care
Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured
with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,
sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the
protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and
fading can result.
4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a
towel, and allow the leather to dry completely.
Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy
leather care kit formulated to clean and beautify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the
protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner
removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream
protectant restores a barrier against soil and
sunlight.
Protecting leather upholstery
Volvo also offers a special leather softener that
should be applied after the cleaner and protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and
reduces friction between leather and other finishes in the vehicle.
1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on
a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream
to the upholstery with light circular movements.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.
This will help the leather resist staining and
protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.
Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and
conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four
times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about
Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429.
Cleaning leather upholstery
1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge
and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.
07
2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the
sponge with circular movements.
3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the
sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,
do not rub.
``
283
07 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care
CAUTION
•
•
Under no circumstances should gasoline, naphtha or similar cleaning agents
be used on the plastic or the leather
since these can cause damage.
Take extra care when removing stains
such as ink or lipstick since the coloring
can spread.
•
Use solvents sparingly. Too much solvent can damage the seat padding.
•
Start from the outside of the stain and
work toward the center.
•
Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a
pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing
may damage the textile upholstery.
•
gent. For best protection in winter, Volvo recommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats.
Consult your Volvo retailer.
Paint repairs require special equipment and
skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any extensive damage.
Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood
surfaces
Minor scratches can be repaired by using
Volvo touch-up paint.
Cleaning interior plastic components should
be done with a cleaning agent specially
designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo
retailer.
Color code
Minor stone chips and scratches
Touching up paintwork
Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild
soap solution.
284
Paint – touch-up pen
Brush
Masking tape
NOTE
Cleaning floor mats
Paint code on the model plate1
The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed
clean regularly, especially during winter when
they should be taken out for drying. Spots on
textile mats can be removed with a mild deter-
Paint damage requires immediate attention to
avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish
regularly, for instance washing the vehicle.
Touch-up if necessary.
see page 288 for the location of the model plate.
Primer – can
If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare
metal and an undamaged color coat remains,
you can add paint immediately after removing
dirt.
Cleaning the seat belts
1
Material:
•
•
•
•
Clothing that is not colorfast, such as
new jeans or suede garments, may stain
the upholstery.
07
Make sure you have the right color. The color
code number is stated on the model plate.
When touching up the vehicle, it should be
clean and dry. The surface temperature
should be above 60 °F (15 °C).
07 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care
Minor scratches on the surface
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to
the metal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains, the touch-up paint can be applied as
soon as the spot has been cleaned.
4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want
to protect surrounding paint by masking it
off
5. After a few days, polish the touched-up
areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount
of polish.
G021832
Repairing stone chips
1. Place a strip of masking tape over the damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that any
loose flakes of paint adhere to it.
2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with
a small brush.
07
3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint
can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint
thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats
and let dry after each application.
285
Label information..................................................................................
Specifications........................................................................................
Overview of information and warning symbols.....................................
Volvo programs.....................................................................................
286
288
290
298
301
SPECIFICATIONS
08 Specifications
Label information
Location of labels
08
288
08 Specifications
Label information
List of labels
Model
plate. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Codes for color and upholstery, etc. The
model plate is located on the rear side of
the B-pillar (the pillar between the front and
rear passenger doors) and the rear passenger's door must be open in order to see
it.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) standards
(Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet
all applicable safety standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the
driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of
the driver's door opening). For further information regarding these regulations, please
consult your Volvo retailer.
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top
left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) should always
be quoted in all correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when
ordering parts.
Vehicle Emission Control Information.
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable emission standards, as evidenced by
the certification label on the underside of
the hood. For further information regarding
these regulations, please consult your
Volvo retailer.
Tire inflation
pressures. This label indicates the correct
inflation pressures for the tires that were on
the vehicle when it left the factory. Canadian models have the upper decal; U.S.
models have the lower one.
08
289
08 Specifications
Specifications
Dimensions–S80/S80 Executive
08
290
Position
Dimension
in (mm)
A
Wheelbase
111.6 (2835)
B
Length
191 (4851)
C
Load length, floor, seatback down
75.9 (1927)
D
Load length, floor
43.1 (1094)
E
Height
58.8 (1493)
F
Load height
14.5 (368)
G
Track, front
62.5 (1588)
08 Specifications
Specifications
Position
Dimension
in (mm)
H
Track, rear
62.4 (1585)
I
Load width, floor
44.5 (1130)
J
Width
73.3 (1861)
K
Width, incl. door mirrors
82.9 (2106)
USA
Canada
Weights
Category
Gross vehicle weight
Capacity weight
6-cyl.
FWDA:
4820 lbs
6-cyl. FWDA: 2190 kg
6-cyl. turbo AWDB: 5020 lbs
6-cyl. turbo AWDB: 2280 kg
8-cyl. AWD: 5110 lbs
8-cyl. AWD: 2320 kg
S80 Executive 6 cyl. FWD: 4820 lbs
S80 Executive 6 cyl. FWD: 2190 kg
S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 5020 lbs
S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 2280 kg
S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 5110 lbs
S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 2320 kg
6-cyl. FWD: 905 lbs
6-cyl. FWD: 410 kg
6-cyl. Turbo AWD: 890 lbs
6-cyl. turbo AWD: 400 kg
8-cyl. AWD: 890 lbs
8-cyl. AWD: 400 kg
S80 Executive 6 cyl. FWD: 905 lbs
S80 Executive 6 cyl. FWD: 410 kg
S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 890 lbs
S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 400 kg
S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 890 lbs
S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 400 kg
08
``
291
08 Specifications
Specifications
Category
USA
Canada
Permissible axle weights, front
6-cyl. FWD: 2690 lbs
6-cyl. FWD: 1220 kg
6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2750 lbs
6-cyl. AWD turbo: 1250 kg
8-cyl. AWD: 2860 lbs
8-cyl. AWD: 1300 kg
S80 Executive 6 cyl. FWD: 2690 lbs
S80 Executive 6 cyl. FWD: 1220 kg
S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 2750 lbs
S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 1250 kg
S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 2860 lbs
S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 1300 kg
6-cyl. FWD: 2270 lbs
6-cyl. FWD: 1030 kg
6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2360 lbs
6-cyl. turbo AWD: 1070 kg
8-cyl. AWD: 2380 lbs
8-cyl. AWD: 1080 kg
S80 Executive 6 cyl. FWD: 2270 lbs
S80 Executive 6 cyl. FWD: 1030 kg
S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 2360 lbs
S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 1070 kg
S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 2380 lbs
S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 1080 kg
3790–4040 lbs
1655–1845 kg
S80 Executive: 3970–4040 lbs
S80 Executive: 1810–1850 kg
220 lbs
100 kg
Permissible axle weights, rear
Curb weight
Max. roof load
08
292
08 Specifications
Specifications
Category
USA
Canada
Max. trailer weights
Without brakes: 1650 lbs
Without brakes: 750 kg
With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 2,000 lbs
With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 900 kg
With brakes, 2” ball: 3,300 lbs
With brakes, 2” ball: 1500 kg
165 lbs
75 kg
Max. tongue weight
A
B
FWD = Front Wheel Drive
AWD = All Wheel Drive
Engine specifications
Specification/Model
3.2 6-cyl.
3.2 6-cyl.
3.0TA
Engine designation
B6324S5
B6324S4
B6304T2
Output (kW/rps)
179/107
171/108
224/93
Output (hp/rpm)
240/6400
230/6500
300/5600
Torque (Nm/rps)
320/53
300/55
440/35 – 70
Torque (ft. lbs./rpm)
236/3200
221/3300
325/2100 – 4200
No. of cylinders
6
6
6
Bore (in/mm)
3.3/84
3.3/84
3.23/82
Stroke (in/mm)
3.78/96
3.78/96
3.67/93.2
08
``
293
08 Specifications
Specifications
A
08
294
Specification/Model
3.2 6-cyl.
3.2 6-cyl.
3.0TA
Displacement
3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.)
3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.)
2.95 liters (175 cu. in.)
Compression ratio
10.8:1
10.3:1
9.3:1
This engine may not be available on all markets
08 Specifications
Specifications
Engine oil
Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC
specification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1.
Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel
economy, engine performance, or engine protection.
good fuel economy and engine protection. See
the viscosity chart.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
symbol
G023491
Depending on your driving habits, premium or
synthetic oils may provide superior fuel economy and engine protection. Consult your Volvo
retailer for recommendations on premium or
synthetic oils.
G022917
Volvo recommends Castrol.
Oil additives must not be used.
Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is
changed at the normal maintenance services.
This oil is only used at customer request, at
additional charge. Please consult your Volvo
retailer.
Oil viscosity
Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life
under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide
Viscosity chart
Extreme engine operation
Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40
and complying with oil quality requirements are
recommended for driving in areas of sustained
temperature extremes (hot or cold), when towing a trailer over long distances, and for prolonged driving in mountainous areas.
The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided into
three parts:
• The upper section describes the oil's performance level.
• The center identifies the oil's viscosity.
• The lower section indicates whether the oil
has demonstrated energy-conserving
properties in a standard test in comparison
to a reference oil.
08
``
295
08 Specifications
Specifications
Oil volume
Engine model
Oil volume between MIN and
MAX
Volume (incl. filter)
3.2 (6-cyl.)
B6324S/S2
1.27 US qts (1.2 liters)
7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)
3.0T (6 cyl.)
B6304T2
1.27 US qts (1.2 liters)
7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)
Fluid
System
Volume
Specification
Transmission oilA
Automatic (TF-80SC)
5.8 US qts (5.5 liters)
Transmission fluid BOT 341
Coolant
3.2 (6-cyl.)
9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters)
3.0T
9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters)
Coolant with corrosion inhibitor
mixed with water (50/50 mix), see
packaging.
All models
1.7 lbs (770 g)
Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a),
PAG oil
Brake fluid
0.63 US qts (0.6 liters)
DOT 4+
Power steering
1.26 US qts (1.2 liters)
Power steering fluid WSS
M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.
Other fluids and lubricants
Air conditioning
08
296
08 Specifications
Specifications
Fluid
System
Volume
Washer fluid
6.8 US qts (6.5 liters)
4.7 US qts (4.5
Fuel tank volume
A
B
Specification
3.0T/3.2 6 cyl.
litersB)
Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo, mixed with
water.
18.5 US gallons (70 liters)
Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.
Models without headlight washers
Electrical system
WARNING
General information
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alternator. Single pole system in which the chassis
and engine block are used as conductors. The
negative terminal is connected to the chassis.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the state of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
Performance, battery
Engine
3.2 6-cyl./3.0T
Voltage (V)
12
Cold start capacity (A)
520 – 700
Reserve capacity (min)
100 – 135
CAUTION
If the battery is replaced, replace it with a
battery of the same cold start capacity and
reserve capacity as the original (see the
decal on the battery).
08
297
08 Specifications
Overview of information and warning symbols
Introduction
Symbols in the main instrument panel
The symbols in the vehicle's various displays
are divided into three main categories:
Warning symbols
Symbol
• Warning symbols
• Indicator symbols
• Information symbols
The following tables list the most common
symbols, their meaning and the pages in this
manual that provide more detailed information.
Description
Symbol
Pag
e
Low oil pressure
74
Parking brake
74
The red warning symbol
lights up to
indicate a problem related to safety and/or
drivability. A message will also appear in the
main instruments panel's display.
SRS airbags
74
Seat belt reminder
75
Information symbol
Generator not charging
75
Fault in the brake
system
75
Warning symbol
75
The information symbol
lights up and a
text message is displayed to provide the driver
with necessary information about one of the
vehicle's systems.
A
A
Canadian models
08
298
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Description
Pag
e
Fault in the Active
Bending Light
(ABL)*system
73
Malfunction indicator
light
73
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
73
Rear fog light on
73
Stability system
(DSTC)
73
Tire pressure monitoring sensor (TPMS)
73
Low fuel level
73
Information symbol,
see text in information
display
73
A
A
Warning symbol
Indicator symbols
A
08 Specifications
Overview of information and warning symbols
Symbol
A
Description
Pag
e
High beam indicator
72
Left turn signal indicator
72
Right turn signal indicator
72
Canadian models
Other information symbols
Symbol
Symbol
Description
Pa
ge
Adaptive Cruise Control *
Symbol
Description
Pa
ge
163,
168
Collision Warning with
Auto-brake*,
177
Adaptive Cruise Control *, Distance Alert*
163,
168,
170
Driver Alert System*
179
Adaptive Cruise Control *, Distance Alert*
163,
168,
170
Active Bending Lights
(ABL)*
90
Fuel filler door (arrow
indicates it is on right
side of vehicle)
72
Rain sensor*
95
Driver Alert System*
180
Driver Alert System*,
Lane Departure Warning*
182
Driver Alert System*,
Lane Departure Warning*
182
Description
Pa
ge
Adaptive Cruise Control *
163,
168
Adaptive Cruise Control *
163,
168
Adaptive Cruise Control *, Distance Alert*
163,
168,
170
Radar sensor*
165
Adaptive Cruise Control *, Distance Alert*
163,
168,
170
Camera*
176
Adaptive Cruise Control*
163,
168
08
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
299
08 Specifications
Overview of information and warning symbols
Information symbols in the center
console display
Symbol
Description
Pa
ge
Audio files
146
CD folder
146
Bluetooth-connected
cell phone
149
BluetoothTM handsfree
149
HD radio
139
Park Assist*
184
Information symbols in the ceiling
console
Symbol
08
300
Description
P
a
g
e
Seat belt reminder
19
Occupant Weight Sensor
26
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Specifications
Volvo programs
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance
Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON
CALL roadside assistance. Additional information, features, and benefits are described in a
separate information package in your glove
compartment.
If you require assistance, dial:
In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63VOLVO)
In Canada 1-800-263-0475
Technician certification
In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo supports certification by the National Institute for
Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certified technicians have demonstrated a high
degree of competence in specific areas.
Besides passing exams, each technician must
also have worked in the field for two or more
years before a certificate is issued. These professional technicians are best able to analyze
vehicle problems and perform the necessary
maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at
peak operating condition.
08
301
09 Index
09
1, 2, 3 ...
Anti-lock brake system............................ 115
warning light......................................... 72
12-volt sockets........................................ 198
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 116
A
Audio system
audio functions...................................
CD player/changer..............................
HD digital radio...................................
overview..............................................
radio functions....................................
Sirius satellite radio............................
sound settings....................................
steering wheel keypad........................
USB/iPodŸ connector........................
Approach lighting................................ 54, 93
ABS (anti-lock brake system).................. 116
Accessory installation warning.................. 13
Active chassis system............................. 158
Active yaw control................................... 156
Adaptive brake lights............................... 115
Adaptive cruise control.................... 161, 163
Airbags
disconnecting the front passenger’s
side................................................. 26, 27
front...................................................... 22
inflatable curtain................................... 32
side impact........................................... 30
Air conditioning........................................ 130
Air distribution.......................................... 127
Air distribution table................................. 132
Air vents................................................... 128
All Wheel Drive......................................... 114
Anti-freeze....................................... 206, 258
302
135
145
139
134
136
142
135
134
137
Auto-dim rearview mirror......................... 101
Automatic locking retractor....................... 37
Automatic transmission
Geartronic................................... 112, 113
general description..................... 112, 113
oil........................................................ 296
shiftlock override................................ 113
Axle weight.............................................. 232
B
Battery
changing............................................. 270
maintenance............................... 269, 270
remote key, replacing........................... 57
specifications...................................... 297
warning symbols................................. 269
Black box................................................... 11
Blind Spot Information System
(BLIS)....................................... 192, 193, 194
Bluetooth cell phone connection............. 148
Booster cushions....................................... 44
Brake lights.............................................. 115
Brake system
checking fluid level............................. 258
emergency brake assistance.............. 116
fluid..................................................... 296
general information............................. 115
warning light......................................... 74
Bulbs
headlights........................... 260, 261, 262
introduction......................................... 260
license plate lights.............................. 264
side marker lights............................... 263
09 Index
09
specifications...................................... 265
trunk lighting....................................... 265
convertible seats.................................. 42
infant seats........................................... 40
Curb weight............................................. 232
Current, conserving................................. 205
Child safety locks...................................... 48
C
Camera, Park Assist................................ 188
Capacity weight....................................... 232
Catalytic converter................................... 211
CD player/changer................................... 145
Cell phone, hands-free connection......... 148
Central locking system, introduction......... 52
Chains...................................................... 235
Check engine light..................................... 72
Child restraints
recalls and registration......................... 47
Child restraint systems..............................
booster cushions..................................
convertible seats..................................
infant seats...........................................
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors........................
top tether anchors................................
38
44
42
40
45
46
Child safety.......................................... 36, 37
booster cushions.................................. 44
child restraint systems.......................... 38
Climate system........................................ 131
air distribution............................. 127, 132
air vents.............................................. 128
Interior Air Quality System.................. 127
introduction......................................... 126
passenger compartment filter............ 127
refrigerant........................................... 126
Clock
analogue............................................... 76
Clock, setting............................................. 76
Cold weather driving................................ 206
Collision warning system......................... 173
Compass in rearview mirror..................... 102
Conserving electrical current................... 205
Convertible seats....................................... 42
D
Defroster.................................................. 131
Detachable key blade.......................... 56, 59
Disconnecting the front passenger’s airbag....................................................... 26, 27
Dome lighting....................................... 92, 93
Door mirrors............................................. 100
Driver alert............................................... 179
Driver distraction warning.......................... 13
Driving economically................................ 204
Driving in cold weather............................ 206
Driving through water.............................. 205
Coolant............................................ 258, 296
Cooling system, general information....... 205
E
Courtesy lighting.................................. 92, 93
Crash mode............................................... 35
Cruise control.................................. 159, 160
adaptive.............................................. 161
ECC......................................... 129, 130, 131
Economical driving.................................. 204
Electric parking brake.............................. 117
303
09 Index
09
F
G
Federal Clean Air Act............................... 252
Gasoline requirements............................. 209
Fluid specifications.................................. 296
Gas tank volume...................................... 296
Fog lights
front/rear............................................... 91
Gauges...................................................... 71
Emergency starting.................................. 110
Emergency towing........................... 218, 219
Four C (active chassis system)................ 158
Geartronic automatic transmission.. 112, 113
Emission inspection readiness................ 253
Front airbags.............................................. 22
disconnecting passenger’s side airbag.................................................. 26, 27
Generator warning light............................. 74
Electronic Climate Control....... 128, 130, 131
air distribution table............................ 132
Interior Air Quality System.................. 131
ventilated seats................................... 129
Emergency locking retractor...................... 37
Engine
overheating........................................... 75
specifications...................................... 293
starting................................................ 108
switching off....................................... 110
Engine compartment overview................ 255
Engine oil
checking............................................. 256
low pressure warning light.............. 73, 74
specifications...................................... 295
volumes.............................................. 296
Front fog lights........................................... 91
Front park assist.............................. 184, 186
Front seats..................................... 80, 82, 86
heated................................................. 129
lumbar support (S80 Executive only).... 86
massage function (S80 Executive only) 86
moving passenger's seat (S80 Executive only)................................................ 87
Geartronic................................................ 113
Glossary of tire terminology..................... 231
Grocery bag holder.................................. 214
Gross vehicle weight............................... 232
H
Hazard warning flashers............................ 91
HD digital radio........................................ 139
Fuel requirements............................ 208, 209
Headlights
Active Bending Lights........................... 90
changing bulbs........................... 261, 262
high/low beams.................................... 89
high beam flash.................................... 89
Fuel tank volume..................................... 296
Headlight washers..................................... 96
Fuses............................... 272, 273, 276, 280
Head restraints, rear seat.......................... 83
Fuel filler cap........................................... 211
Environment............................................... 12
Fuel filler door, opening........................... 210
Eyelets for anchoring loads..................... 213
Fuel level warning light.............................. 73
Heated front seats................................... 129
304
09 Index
09
L
Heated oxygen sensors........................... 212
Inspection readiness................................ 253
Heated rear seats.................................... 129
Instrument lighting..................................... 89
High beams................................................ 89
indicator light........................................ 73
Instrument overview............................ 70, 71
Instrument panel...................................... 124
Labels
list of................................................... 289
location of........................................... 288
Hoisting the vehicle................................. 253
Interior Air Quality System....................... 127
LATCH anchors......................................... 45
Home safe lighting..................................... 93
Interior lighting..................................... 92, 93
Leather care............................................. 283
Hood, opening/closing............................ 255
iPodŸ connector (audio system)............. 137
Lighting panel............................................ 89
Horn........................................................... 88
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 45
Load anchoring eyelets........................... 213
I
J
Ignition modes........................................... 78
Important information.................................. 8
Jack
attaching............................................. 244
location of........................................... 243
Indicator lights......................... 71, 72, 73, 74
Jump starting........................................... 110
Immobilizer................................................ 53
Infant seats................................................ 40
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 32
Inflation pressure..................................... 225
Inflation pressure tables.................. 227, 228
Information and warning symbols, table
of.............................................................. 298
Information lights..................... 71, 72, 73, 74
Information symbol.................................... 73
Loading the vehicle.......................... 213, 232
roof loads............................................ 215
Locking...................................................... 63
Locking the vehicle.................................... 54
Locks, child safety..................................... 48
Low beams................................................ 89
Low fuel level warning light........................ 73
Low oil pressure warning light................... 74
K
Key blade................................. 52, 56, 59, 60
private locking...................................... 59
valet locking.......................................... 59
Keyless drive
general description............................... 60
starting the vehicle............................. 108
M
Main instrument panel............................. 124
Maintenance............................................ 252
hoisting the vehicle............................. 253
performed by the owner..................... 253
305
09 Index
09
Malfunction indicator light......................... 72
Oil
checking............................................. 256
specifications...................................... 295
volumes.............................................. 296
Menu system........................................... 122
overview.............................................. 122
On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 301
Power mirrors.......................................... 100
defroster............................................. 101
Overhead courtesy lighting.................. 92, 93
Power moonroof...................................... 103
Overheating, engine................................... 75
Power steering
fluid..................................................... 259
speed-dependent............................... 158
Messages in the instrument panel........... 124
Mirrors
defroster.............................................
power door.........................................
rearview, auto-dim function................
retractable...........................................
vanity..................................................
101
100
101
100
198
Moonroof................................................. 103
Oxygen sensors, heated.......................... 212
Power steering fluid................................. 296
P
Motor oil
checking............................................. 256
specifications...................................... 295
volumes.............................................. 296
Park Assist Camera................................. 188
O
Parking brake
electric, applying/releasing................. 117
warning light......................................... 74
Occupant safety........................................ 16
Occupant weight sensor...................... 26, 27
Octane recommendations....................... 209
Odometer, trip........................................... 76
Power front seat
memory function................................... 81
with keyless drive................................. 82
Paint, touching up.................................... 284
Park assist....................................... 184, 186
Parking lights............................................. 90
changing bulbs................................... 263
Personal Car Communicator, unique functions........................................................... 55
Polishing.................................................. 282
Power windows......................................... 98
laminated glass..................................... 99
Pregnancy, using seat belts during........... 20
Private locking........................................... 59
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING.. 110, 271, 297
R
Radio
Sirius satellite radio............................ 142
Radio functions........................................ 136
HD digital radio................................... 139
Rain sensor................................................ 95
READ button............................................ 124
306
09 Index
09
Rear fog light............................................. 91
locking the vehicle................................ 54
Personal Car Communicator.......... 54, 55
replacing the battery............................. 57
unlocking the vehicle............................ 54
Rear park assist............................... 184, 186
Rear seats
center head restraint............................. 83
folding................................................... 83
heated................................................. 129
Rearview mirror
auto-dim function............................... 101
compass............................................. 102
Remote key/PCC
common functions................................ 54
Reporting safety defects............................ 17
Roadside Assistance............................... 301
Roof loads............................................... 215
Rear window defroster............................ 101
Recalls, child restraints.............................. 47
Refrigerant............................................... 296
Refrigerator (S80 Executive only)............ 200
Refueling.......................................... 208, 209
fuel filler cap....................................... 211
fuel filler door...................................... 210
fuel tank volume................................. 296
Registering child restraints........................ 47
Remote control
private locking...................................... 59
Remote key................................................ 52
approach lighting.................................. 54
immobilizer........................................... 53
key blade.................................. 52, 56, 59
key memory.......................................... 53
S
S80 Executive
analogue clock..................................... 76
front seat lumbar support..................... 86
front seat massage function................. 86
glasses................................................ 200
moving the front passenger's seat....... 87
refrigerator.......................................... 200
Safety, occupant........................................ 16
Safety defects, reporting........................... 17
Seat belt
reminder................................................ 19
Seat belts
Automatic locking retractor/Emergency
locking retractor.................................... 37
buckling................................................ 18
maintenance......................................... 18
pretensioners........................................ 18
reminder................................................ 18
reminder warning light.......................... 74
securing child restraint systems.......................................... 40, 42, 44
unbuckling............................................ 18
use during pregnancy........................... 20
using..................................................... 18
Seats, front.................................... 80, 81, 86
Side door mirrors..................................... 100
Side impact airbags................................... 30
Side marker lights, changing bulbs......... 263
Sirius satellite radio.................................. 142
Snow chains............................................ 235
Snow tires................................................ 235
Sound settings, audio system................. 135
Spare tire................................................. 236
Speed-dependent steering...................... 158
Spin control............................................. 156
SRS............................................................ 21
307
09 Index
09
Stability system............................... 156, 157
indicator light........................................ 73
Starting the engine.................................. 108
with keyless drive............................... 108
Starting the vehicle
after a crash (crash mode).................... 35
Start inhibitor (immobilizer)........................ 53
Steering wheel
adjusting............................................... 88
horn....................................................... 88
keypad.................................. 88, 122, 134
Stone chips, touching up......................... 284
Storage spaces........................................ 196
Studded tires........................................... 235
Sunroof (moonroof).................................. 103
Sun shade.................................................. 99
Supplemental restraint system.................. 21
warning light......................................... 74
Symbols, overview................................... 298
Tire designations..................................... 229
Traction control........................................ 156
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 246, 247
indicator light........................................ 73
Trailer towing................................... 216, 217
trailer hitch.......................................... 217
Tires......................................................... 222
age...................................................... 222
changing from summer to winter........ 223
glossary of terms................................ 231
improving economy............................ 222
inflation pressure................................ 225
inflation pressure tables............. 227, 228
load ratings......................................... 226
rotation............................................... 223
snow................................................... 235
spare................................................... 236
specifications...................................... 226
speed ratings...................................... 226
storing................................................. 223
studded............................................... 235
tire pressure monitoring system......... 246
tread wear indicator............................ 224
uniform tire quality grading................. 234
Transmission
general description..................... 112, 113
oil........................................................ 296
shiftlock override................................ 113
Top tether anchors (child restraint systems).......................................................... 46
308
T
Touching up paint.................................... 284
Temporary spare tire............................... 236
Towing a trailer................................ 216, 217
trailer hitch.......................................... 217
Three-way catalytic converter................. 211
Towing the vehicle........................... 218, 219
Tread wear indicator................................ 224
Trip computer.......................................... 154
Trip odometers.......................................... 76
Trips, long distance................................. 205
Trunk
changing bulbs................................... 265
driving with it open............................. 204
Turn signals............................................... 92
changing bulbs................................... 263
indicator lights...................................... 73
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 234
Unlocking the vehicle.......................... 54, 63
Upholstery care....................................... 283
09 Index
09
V
Valet locking.............................................. 59
Vanity mirror............................................ 198
changing bulbs................................... 265
Washer fluid..................................... 268, 296
Washers
headlight............................................... 96
windshield............................................. 95
Water, driving through............................. 205
Vehicle Event Data..................................... 11
Waxing..................................................... 282
Vehicle loading................................ 213, 232
roof loads............................................ 215
Weights.................................................... 291
Vehicle maintenance................................ 252
performed by the owner..................... 253
Wheels..................................................... 222
changing..................................... 243, 244
storing................................................. 223
Vehicle weights........................................ 291
Whiplash Protection System..................... 33
Ventilated seats....................................... 129
Windows
power.................................................... 98
Volvo and the environment........................ 12
Volvo maintenance.................................. 252
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 301
Volvo programs....................................... 301
Windshield
IR coating.............................................
rain sensor............................................
washers................................................
wipers/washers.....................................
96
95
96
95
W
Windshield washer fluid................... 268, 296
Warning flashers, hazard........................... 91
Wiper blades
replacing windshield wipers............... 267
Warning lights.......................... 71, 72, 73, 74
Windshield wipers.................................... 267
Warning symbol......................................... 75
Warning system, collision........................ 173
Warranties................................................ 252
309
09 Index
09
310
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&&,))JH68VcVYV!6I&%'%!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<ŽiZWdg\'%&%!8deng^\]i©'%%%"'%&%Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc